Home

User Manual

1. I EqualPats I Direction ane E add et Delete Modi User can input various parameters of the axis in each field Input dimension parameter in Number and Dimension field and press Add button to add these 86 InteriCAD T5 User Manual parameters to the end of the corresponding list The parameters can be input one by one Buttons such as Insert Delete Modify and Reset can be used to modify the parameters Explanation of each field in the dialogue box Sections the section partition sequence determined by current rotate direction shown in angle using degree as unit Interval the interval dimension sequence ranking ascending Use mm as Its unit Angle the angle of the section represents wrap angle when divided equally Number the repeat number of times of the section angle represents division number when divided equally Dimension the length parameter of the interval Number the repeat number of times of the interval dimension Radius the radius of the most inside grid on center Angle the inclination between the start of grid on center and X axis forward direction Shared axis the value indicates whether to draw the axes in the intersection with other grids It has four forms Locating point the insert point of grid on center It has three positions Equal parts when this option is active the section angle represents the whole wrap angle Direction when this option is acti
2. Please click contour point Please click contour point Please click contour point Please click contour point nil a A wll 5 16PM 4 Create another slope ceiling or plain ceiling on the left side 243 InteriCAD T5 User Manual File View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling Light Setting Render Animation Optimize Help al gt e ua IB e ale de gt ls 188 MALO Aba EJEA ANS OS edit select ceiling patch base line Please click contour point Please click contour point Please click contour point Please click contour point nil 5 Click Merge wall to extend the wall to ceiling 6 Click cy to Switch to the perspective view and you will see the final effect as following 244 InteriCAD T5 User Manual MGXVR Unnamed View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling Light Setting Render Animation Optimize Hel MCL BD Ble as eS mw e MECA gO MALAKSAN bea EN 4 Mz wll 7 49 PM 9 3 13 Setting Unit Choose inch or meter as measurement Basic operations Click File gt Setting gt Unit gt Decimal If you change the size of the object you ll see the dimension of the object will be shown in inch Click File gt Setting gt Unit gt Architectural lf you change the size of the object you ll see the dimension of the object will be shown in meter Auto Bright
3. 211 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Sunlight Setting Set sunlight and relative parameters Lighting List Show all lights in scene and enter light edit menu Smart Light Automatically create lights in the Smart Light Setting Decide whether to keep the existing light in the scene Special Light 1 Set an invisible light Wattage is 40 Special Light 2 Set an invisible light Wattage is 500 Delete Special Light Delete special light Render Start Radiosity Perform radiosity calculation of the current whole scene Raytrace Do raytrace calculation of the current perspective workplace Partial Raytrace Do partial area raytrace calculation of the current perspective workplace Stop Stop the calculation of radiosity raytrace and animation preview Instant Render On Off Turn on off instant render Instant Render Refresh Refresh rendering after adjustments of lights objects and materials Set Background Set the exterior background Light Adjustment You can only adjust the whole brightness before you use radiosity And after you use radiosity the effect after using raytrace can be previewed and the brightness and exposure of the entire environment can be controlled Light Adjustment without Radiosity The effect after using raytrace can be previewed before and after using radiosity 212 InteriCAD T5 User Manual and the brightness and exposure of the entire environment can be controlled E
4. 299 InteriCAD T5 User Manual The system has no limits to the number of the camera and you can switch willfully First Camera From the view menu select Camera gt First Camera command The system will switch to the first camera view in the camera list Last Camera From the view menu select Camera gt Last Camera command The system will switch to the last camera in the camera list and return to perspective status 9 4 11 Show Camera List From the wew menu click Show Camera List command the camera list dialogue box appears View List This dialogue box will display all the cameras and all of them have preview pictures Every time you switch from a perspective view to a special view such as plane view the Auto Save system will automatically save the camera Double click continuously and rapidly click the left button twice the camera preview picture that needs to be switched and then the workplace will be switched to that camera Right click this preview picture Two options popup the function of Show is the same as double clicking the left button Remove can delete the current camera The function of Redraw is to refresh the preview picture according to current scene For example the current scene has used radiosity and the camera preview picture set before radiosity can be updated to the effect achieved o Row after using radiosity 9 5 Products Library 9 5 1 Show Library From the Products
5. 2 Left click the surface that will be edited After selection right click to confirm the selection This selection operation is the same as that of ACAD 3 Left click one point as the move base point or start point 4 Move the mouse and you can see the surface dynamically moves 313 InteriCAD T5 User Manual following the mouse Left click to confirm Rotate Surface Basic operations 1 2 From the Object menu select Edit Surface and then Rotate Left click the object that will be edited and right click to confirm the selection Use the left button to single click one point as the rotate center point Move the mouse and you can see the surface dynamically rotates following the mouse Press the left button to confirm Scale Surface Basic operations 1 2 From the Object menu select Edit Surface and then Scale Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection Use the left button to single click one point as the scale base point and single click the other point as the scale reference point Move the mouse and you can see the surface dynamically scales following the mouse Press the left button to confirm Mirror Surface Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Surface and then Mirror 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 Use the left button to single
6. 224 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template Template file y Default General setting T Frame Doorsill E Wall User Define Wall decoration Sl single door Thickness 41 i Door frame Door ground Matera Dual door Push door Handle La lt lt Collapse door 4 Balcony door Door Model lt lt H Window X 4 mI gt Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Door frame Default System will automatically generate a door frame for the single door By parameter You can define width thickness section as well as material for the frame Fit map System will automatically adjust the map size for the frame material Model file You can define a VR model mrm block for the frame and set the relevant values Create template loor frame setting Wall decoration Default M By parameter Single door Parameter Door frame Width 90 Thickness 10 Door ground Dual door F Material El 7 Door frame E Section Door Cover Door ground l Push door Fit Map Collapse door Balcony door Model File Lu lt lt Window Inner Width 900 Inner Hei ht 21 DO Bay res z a i H MA J gt Thickness 77 Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel 223 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Door ground Default System will automatically define material for the door ground Material You can define your favorit
7. For example you can easily change the vault door into the square one Position By using the Edit Attribute you can modify the position of doors amp windows which will be automatically updated after the modification In ACAD position of doors amp window will not be updated even the move command has been carried out Width amp Height The size of doors amp windows Is defined by Width amp Height Offset amp Raise Offset is used to measure the level distance between midline of wall and midline of doors amp windows The offset value can be positive or negative representing offset direction of doors amp windows Raise is used to measure the upright distance from the bottom of doors amp windows to bottom of wall Swing Left or Right There are two types of swing direction that can only do the Edit operation One is left or right while the other is in or out 8 3 7 Wood Line Attribute Edit Dialog box of wood line is shown as follow 197 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Attribute Name Unnamed Library A1SL000004704 Profile Base Shape Profile Thickness 23 Profile Height 60 Rotate 0 Smoothness of Profile 5 Smoothness of Curve Baseline 16 Direction Inward Color BYLAYER Hide No Display 3D By using Edit Attribute you can modify various attributes including Profile Base Shape Profile Dimension both profile thickness amp height Rotate Smoothness of Profile
8. InteriCAD T5 User Manual the ceiling board surface to be calculated according to a higher subdivide length The system provides this function Do as follows e Select Surface Radiosity Setting from Optimize menu e Left click the surface that will be adjusted with pressing Shift for multiple selection e Right click then the Surface option dialogue box will pop up Surface Option Q Epslion EE Global ee ll St Subdivide lv Global kG Epslion Y Global Indirect Subdivide iv Global Cancel e Default precision follows global setting Remove ticks before Global and input appropriate precision value 9 11 2 Raytrace amp Partial Raytrace Raytrace technology in InteriCAD VR can affect day light target spot light and material such as highlight material metal and glass etc And the effect is real while the calculation speed is fast Besides that day light target spot light will have clear shadow and lighting boundary only under raytrace option Furthermore all the special effect texture mappings need the support of raytrace It is recommended that the final result be export using raytrace Raytrace calculation can be performed before and after radiosity The table below is the comparison of the two raytrace before radiosity raytrace after radiosity The effect is not very real The effect is real Only the target spot that calculates the All the light source lighting effects of direct light ca
9. Note 1 We will provide some Photometric Web texture mappings in the system InteriCAD fashion maps for light And it is convenient to make this texture mapping by PHOTOSHOP or others software 2 You can use Photometric Web texture mapping only when it is target 365 366 InteriCAD T5 User Manual spot light Activate the Calculate Direct Lighting option of target spot light so that there will be clear pattern after raytrace The Management of Light Source Group and Adjustment InteriCAD VR provides light source grouping function and supports up to 10 groups You can redefine the group freely The operation is the same as the common real time strategy game which is very convenient The light source grouping status and light intensity parameter can be displayed directly on the workspace Shown as the following figure these three spot lights have been set in one group named 3 The light intensity of all the three spot lights is 4 watt Basic Operations Select Lighting Edit command the light source grouping status and its light intensity parameter will be displayed First left click light source red color objects and then add it with the operation SHIFT left click To remove the light source also SHIFT left click Select the light source that will be grouped and use CTRL 0 9 to make these light sources become one group For example CTRL 1 means the name of this light source group is 1 It is very convenie
10. 0 manufacturer 7 Texture Select Browse and then select the mrm file in the pop up file dialog 262 InteriCAD T5 User Manual tp E IT ID New Folder ESTCED 4502700 mem TFE H CRI 4502700 mrm o TFN T Fr eyi ew mrm Hig 00000 unknown 100001 dried flower 00004 decorative book 00005 decorative candlestick 100006 photo frame 00007 dothing 00008 decorative boxe 100009 lt children s decoration 00010 arm cushion 100011 lt urtain 00016 decoration 10301 square dining table 10202 rectangulare dinging tz 03 desk 04 suare end table 05 end table a entertaiment table 110307 side thle Dap triangle side table 110309 ound end table 10310 round dinging table 10a11 computer desk 10b01 corner sofa 10b02 other sofa se 134002 eimnle enta In this dialog users need to select a catalog for the model for example the 263 InteriCAD T5 User Manual model is a sofa or a chair After selecting the model s catalog you can see the ID is generated automatically and it won t be repeated User can input more attributes for the models in the dialog box Model Import File if documents and settings yyfcad desktop new mrm Browse name crd 4502700 Class 00013 Get length 2700 Type crd 4502700 Color Width 475 ID 70000 16 Brand Ergo Height
11. 1 Select Floor from the Floor menu 2 Select the area boundaries These may include more than one closed area 3 Pick a point to determine the area where the floor will be generated 4 Specify the height of the floor It calculates from the XY plane of the coordinate system 5 The system will ask whether to generate the floor pattern If the answer is N no pattern will be done and the slab will be generated directly If the answer is Y or you press Enter then Floor Pattern dialogue box appears Please refer to Floor Pattern for detailed operations 4 9 2 Floor Pattern No grid is needed for rendering if floor pattern has been applied You can assign materials directly Basic operations 1 Answer Yes when the system asks you whether to create pattern on floor 144 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Input the definition data in the Floor Pattern dialogue box Press OK Type Stripes Square Tiles Checkers Size of Width A 5 Spacing gt Angle Width B 12 Cancel In this dialogue box option Inlay is only valid if the pattern is square tiles or checkers When Square tiles is selected the distance between the two separation lines of every cell is width B and the brick s dimension should be based on it 3 Select the area boundary These may include more than one closed area 4 Select a point to determine the area where the floor will be generated 5 Select the projection locating point whi
12. 2 11 Enter 3D From 2D to Virtual Reality td 41 2 11 1 How to Import from 2D to Virtual Reality ooooonnnnnnnnnnncnnnononononononnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 41 Chapter a E sramio Module rara ide 43 Sul Caine Module tarta idiota 43 IS A A RA A Ee PET 44 ike Pac AMR A o A E E EE CuI Hymne ir men TV pene ET A E Orme E tenn ET iene E 45 Sl Rectan mar Reca ARA aa 45 il DAW ARC CIO Mri e a ns ec leer ll ees 46 S33 Door REO aio ei 46 a A A 47 83 3 9 Modi y Ravine Renta E edad 47 A RN A meats Cuahinatnet ranks Moideedeusauess Qadbanatunae as toubumataneets uibeniaus 50 SO Workable aves A A A A A da 51 E A a NICH Seencrny ponte Ove Monet Te OBET EC Tre tac Ton Cree nt ae 53 Sto Place Tiles mthe REO Md a ES DA Ai ts 54 344 Replace Tien the Recto rise tas io e adas 55 3 4 5 Region Tiling Begins from Tlles ai E 55 S37 Eo OE Mis 65 5310 eSP rt E EN ERTE een ae 66 SOL ooeec a Plie aaa a a a eaten eaetbe ee wotsows 66 S202 les Plan Management ciinei eea E E A AAA 68 S3 AsSSistant FUNCHUOM A il a 72 InteriCAD T5 User Manual SA A RN 72 Sa Jide AWAN HO Soriana id 73 SO SOMOVA A O ss 73 SA HE CUE SINE ARAS NR AAA A 73 Sor Tiles Create Metodo di a 74 Fe peo TUES DUAL A A A A eT 74 S39 Cerannc Database Mana coment lt 4cciwiceaciiatat asivetwnstlelabasineedumnaeiaaaiswidune Gara waateudomeataresaaiuentors 76 Sl Function DOLON musica di sita 71 392 Add Ceramic to Databases id IS a a 78 3 9 3 Modify Ceramic Information in Da
13. 341 InteriCAD T5 User Manual mapping coordinate is 500x500x500 2 How to set plan texture mapping coordinate eo From the Material menu select Resetmap then Plan Map e Left click relevant surface and right click Note this operation will automatically clear out existing texture mapping coordinate setting on the selected surface The default size of plan texture mapping coordinate is 500x500 3 How to set cylinder texture mapping coordinate eo From the Material menu select Resetmap then select Cylinder Map e Left click relevant surface and right click Note this operation will automatically clear out existing texture mapping coordinate setting on the selected surface 4 How to set sphere texture mapping coordinate eo From the Material menu select Resetmap then Sphere Map o Left click relevant surface and right click to enter B Relations between four types of texture mapping coordinate and UCS The texture mapping coordinate is closely relevant to user coordinate system UCS The status of UCS may have the same texture mapping coordinate produce completely different effect Relation between plan texture mapping coordinate and UCS The origin of UCS is projection location point and the red axis Z axis specifies the projection direction of texture mapping coordinate The UCS of the first view shown as fellows is on the top surface of that cube while that of the second view is on the front surface From the two views y
14. Fe CREPE 9708 j TES kha gt trees H CREPE 2601 jpg CREPE 2608 jpe CREP HF 0 FM TT ipe IE Gk jpg E Ep iB 4 no a 260 InteriCAD T5 User Manual After that the texture files have been added into the library Name CREPE 2601 Class Length 1000 00 Xdata Param Type CREPE 2601 Color with 1000 00 1D 2000000001 Brand Height 1000 00 Price 0 00 l Manufacturer W Texture E ID Name Type Class Brand Manufacturer Price Length D 1 2000000001 CREPE 2601 CREPE 2601 0 00 1000 2 2000000004 CREPE 2608 CREPE 260 0 00 1000 3 2000000007 REPE 2620 CREPE 262 0 00 1000 4 200000000 CREPE 2649 CREPE 2646 0 00 1000 5 2000000008 CREPE 9701 CREPE 9701 0 00 1000 6 200000000 CREPE 9708 CREPE 9704 0 00 1000 T 2000000001 CREPE 9709 CREPE 970 0 00 1000 amp 2000000008 CREPE 9711 CREPE 9711 0 00 1000 a 200000000 CREPE 9713 CREPE 971 0 00 1000 10 2000000010 CREPE 9727 CREPE 9725 0 00 1000 11 2000000011 CREPE 9729 CREPE 972 0 00 1000 12 2000000012 CREPE 9730 CREPE 9730 0 00 1000 13 2000000012 CREPE 9735 CREPE S735 0 00 1000 14 200000001 CREPE 9737 CREPE 9731 0 00 1000 15 200000001 CREPE 9740 CREPE 974 0 00 1000 16 200000001 CREPE 9744 OL CREPE 974 0 00 1000 17 2000000015 5N 2326 SN 2326 0 00 1000 18 2
15. InteriCAD T5 User Manual A O emaa ionesanae outa eebacee 386 A Bate RNI A O E 387 SAI LTS Channel PCT casada 390 OOo LO Hand Drawno A SSA AAA A AEREA 391 q moon A PO 393 SILLAS NR asi 395 OO AD O A O 396 SOM RECO aia IS Nai 397 A Ds SOE CL PAU Nieise sccsatshacersatanpensy ate descnansdaseatusatencaseadavcbenocactonses uoteaatwaamenccnemueaaaiaceaes 397 SIDO DE A A AA AA odes hancetleucast 400 A O O E A E 402 OO SAVE LM RD A 402 991270 PREVIEW AMINO o dit 403 STA EA O ANA O E CN eRe Ee 404 A as E E T chcuats O 406 SOS OPUS SUr ACS aia 406 93S 2 Optimizer ica idad Qo eet eauads dada 407 SF AGB Opti Ze Modeliai etc atl A A E eutahntdoasehddlewad 407 OO 1 een Ze DIG Ay tts acct ana a R 408 89 135 our ace Radiosity Seine iaa A 409 Chapter 10 Online Cloud Dba ty ei cesses A a a ass 410 xi InteriCAD T5 User Manual xil InteriCAD T5 User Manual Chapter 1 System Introduction This chapter introduces how to startup the system and describes the system interface and also introduces the system tool bar in detail 1 1 System Startup You can startup the system using any of the following methods 1 Double click the InteriCAD T5 shortcut on the WINDOWS desktop 2 Select Program from start menu and then YFCAD Software InteriCAD T5 1 2 System Interface The system main window looks as follows Modeling 2D Design Render Copyright 1994 2010 Guangzhou YuanFang Computer Software Engineering Co Ltd All Right
16. Note When you change 318 InteriCAD T5 User Manual scale by inputting values in the panel the scaling center is located at the bottom center and you can only change the whole scale of the furniture when you change scale by dragging with the mouse you can set the scaling center to any point and change scale of any specify part of the furniture Besides that the yellow square on the corners can be dragged along two axes while those at the middle of lines can only be dragged along one axis While activating Keep Proportion the size of the object can only be changed in proportion Press space bar to switch scaling rectangle Click Apply to finish scaling e Click Mirror button in the Edit dialogue box or right click on the object to select the rectangle will disappear There are 3 options under this mode and you can mirror it along X Y Z axis x axis mirror y axis mirror Z axis mirror 319 InteriCAD T5 User Manual There are two methods to select objects in VR Single Selection and Window Selection e Single Selection is the default select mode Hold Shift to add more Only clicked objects will be selected in this mode e You can select scattered objects by Window Selection The sofa below was exploded in modeling before import every cushion is an independent object in VR First of all select Window Selection from Object menu Then choose X button from tool bar Select one of the sofa s armrests and hol
17. Single Click Pan to activate it Press the left button to drag you can pan the drawing display in real time 9 4 7 Look at Single Click the Look at SZ button Left click the surface that will be viewed The camera will automatically aim at this surface 249 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 4 8 Zoom Mode Zoom Select Zoom gt Zoom in the View menu The mouse automatically moves into the workspace Moving upwards the mouse is to zoom in the objects while moving downwards the mouse is to zoom out the objects Zoom Window Note this command is invalid under perspective view status Select Zoom gt Zoom Window in the View menu Click to select the first point of a rectangle area Move the mouse and click to specify the second point And the selected objects will be maximally displayed in the rectangle area Zoom Extend Note this command is invalid under perspective view status Select Zoom gt Zoom Extend in the View menu And the system will adjust the current workspace to display all placed objects in it Zoom Rotate Select Zoom gt Zoom Rotate in the View menu And the system will adjust the current workspace to display all placed objects in it Move left or right to rotate the scene 9 49 UCS Set UCS Set a surface to set UCS Basic operations 1 Select UCS gt UCS On in the View menu to turn on UCS 2 Select UCS gt Set UCS in the View menu 3 Left click any surface in the scene and the current space coordina
18. Worktop Lines Others r Wall unit elevation C Blevation to the top of unit Elevation to the bottom of unit Elevation 1500 Dynamic Orientation Only align to unit back C Align to unit back or front To make door shape filler width is bigger than 160 To design electric position after fing appliance To design water position after fixing sink r To check clear after fixing hob To check clear after fing sink 9 6 15 Set Current Room InteriCAD T5 can import more than one room to VR So user must use Select Current Room function to select the room for designing Select Set Current Room from Kitchen Design and then in the pop up dialogue left click to select a room to design the cabinet Also user can rename the room 306 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 7 Object 9 7 1 Single Selection Function Select mouse clicked objects only Select Single Selection from Object And then we could select objects one by one 9 7 2 Box Selection Function Select all objects contained in the selection window Select Box Selection from Object Press Shift and left click to select different objects In this way all objects contained in the selection window will be selected 9 7 3 Surface Repair After entering InteriCAD VR all the model faces Surface Orientation will be transformed to single face to decrease l f Reverse Connected Faces data amount So calle
19. ink of printer Image Display Mode There are o optional modes sven ab Filling C Wirelrand 2 10 2 Image Quality Function set image quality as requirements this setting is obvious when the scene is relatively large Basic operations 1 Click the Setting gt Image Quality 2 In the popup dialogue box set low quality or high quality You can choose different quality You are suggested to keep the default setting 2 10 3 Unit 36 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Function you can choose the units used in this drawing between metric and imperial as well as the precision The change will apply after restart the program 2 10 4 Snap on Function lt is an auxiliary drawing tool When furniture and columns are very close to wall you can activate Snap on function to automatically lean them on the wall and reverse them appropriately This tool greatly facilitates furniture setting However if furniture is very close to wall rather than fully lean against wall activation of the Snap on will make the operation difficult Basic operations lf there is a mark near the Snap on command in the Snap menu it indicates that the function is on otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF status of the Magnetic toolbar function by clicking the Snap on command in the setting menu Node Snap Function lt is an auxiliary drawing tool When the tool and some drawing commands are on the mouse can automatically snap certain objec
20. 3 2 Interface The system main window looks as follow DESS i c Lo x EL 7253 InteriCAD T5 ad A E 2 i File Edit View Draw RoomStructure Ceiling Region Pave Enter3D Setting Help g na T5 Tiles Database a 116 IO E dali A hih MeMa z i a je 1D O A i JG r Tiles Plan lt TAA O a A A o eve Board Line Insert I A Pave Door Region auld Tiles Quotation Column Tiles Dimension Door Wind Anchor a Hide All Anchors Zoom Extend Show All Anchors Zoom Window Tiles Cut Style Snap Tiles Create Method Snap Setting 13 Tiles Dimension Style Line Default Tiles Gap Update VR 4 NE Cirde i Elipse P LI Pline Text Export to VR Export to Modeling IV Snap atlength Y Snap at angle Y Snap atnode Snap at grid The arrow pointed parts are commands used in Ceramic Module The ceramic king system is in the 2D Design part You can refer to the 2D Design Chapter for detailed information 44 InteriCAD T5 User Manual I MGXVR C nteriCADT5 vrisystem empty mrs Diva Meti File View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling Light Setting Render Animation Optimize Hel g J gj g g p p a p gt illo 5c E A a y Tiling Design Clear Tiling Se Q A Er R x k Y A Apply Tiling Plan Replace Tile Split Surface Extrude Surface N Quotation The Ceramic King 3D Design i
21. Operation Click Lib Maintain and a dialogue box popup shown as the following lane Class House Livingroom plan Livingroo w Part Backup Backup All Merge Pickup Map Modify Delete i i i Description Livingroom plani4 Detail In the Name amp class field select a plan to be edited or deleted lf you want to edit the plan click Modify then you can modify its name description and details However the materials used by this plan cannot be changed lf you want to delete the plan click Delete button If you subsequently click OK then the plan has been deleted Backup of plan database and texture mapping and merge of databases Backup function can backup currently selected plan The backup file is colorplan dat Note that if you have already saved a backup file you can repeatedly backup other plans into the file and needn t to set it every time Backup all can backup the entire match color library Merge function can merge databases for backup file Pickup Map can backup all mappings used by the plan to a directory Note that only those mappings under the CAD search path can be found The other files that cannot be found will be indicated in a txt file InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 9 Tiling 9 9 1 Tiling Design Layout ceramic slices on object surface in Render Basic operations 1 Select the Tiling Design command from the Tiling menu 2 Left click to select the object s
22. There are two methods of export Use Texture or No Texture Basic operations 1 Select Hand Drawing from Render menu 2 Input file name and save path 3 Set output size and export method InteriCAD T5 User Manual save Image Image Size 4 Click OK to export results are shown as below Use Texture 392 InteriCAD T5 User Manual MA No Texture 89 11 17 Export Dxf Export DXF file to give clients a better view of the scene s 3D structure and export 3D frame 2D frame drawing and DXF from any angle for further edit in modeling AutoCAD BtoCAD Basic operations 1 Select Export Dxf from Render menu and then you can take a look at the preview in the pop up dialogue Haers d O a 3Dframe 393 InteriCAD T5 User Manual a U 2D frame drawing 2 Click Save and input file name and save path Result is shown as below ET Btocab 2009 Oeser l a file Edit View hnsert Format Tools Draw Dimension Mod y Window Hel a x IS Sli Ae is hE sz PAPEL MAA el Y 3 f A gt Z o B0 o a O i E gt E Or 11360 gt it p 394 InteriCAD T5 User Manual A al Ele Edit jew Insert Format Jools Draw Dimension Modify Window Help Express 2 jm 2590 20 Q 1250 sz APA A AA 7 S o 5 oevrwrer gt Bylayer aye IONTOLNN Pit ADOLE I 9 11 18 Net Render Note This
23. You can press the left button to drag upward and downward to 247 InteriCAD T5 User Manual change the viewpoint of the front view to get ideal result Click the Back View button The system will automatically switch to back view and the position of the viewpoint will maintain the same with the perspective view If the position of the perspective viewpoint is in front of the scene there will be no object in the back view You can press the left button to drag upward and downward to change the viewpoint of the back view to get ideal result Click the Left View button The system will automatically switch to left view and the position of the viewpoint will maintain the same with that of the perspective view If the position of the perspective viewpoint is on the left of the scene there will be no object in the left view You can press the left button to drag upward and downward to change the viewpoint of the left view to get ideal result Click the Right View button The system will automatically switch to right view and the position of the viewpoint will maintain the same with that of the perspective view If the position of the perspective viewpoint is on the right of the scene there will be no object in the right view You can press the left button to drag upward and downward to change the viewpoint of the right view to get ideal result Click the Last View button The system will automatically switch to the last view in perspective statu
24. amp Curve Baseline and Direction etc 1 Profile You can pick up the profile from the library or you can get it by choosing self defined curves on the screen There are two relative attributes of Profile in the Attribute of Edit Attribute They are Library and Profile You can find the profile curves available in the Library while self defined profile can be obtained in Profile In addition you can even extract the profile curves from selected woodline in Profile 2 Base Shape Base Shape is the path to make wood line Operation of Edit Copy and Extract can be carried out 3 Profile Dimension There are two types of attribute Profile Thickness amp Profile Height Profile Height is the profile dimension in the direction of normal from the baseline 198 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Here both direction of baseline and direction of normal baseline are perpendicular to Profile Thickness Either Thickness or Height can be edited separately In the following example you can see the Height of wood line is doubled while the thickness stays unaltered 8 3 8 Wall Hole Attribute Edit Dialog box of wall hole is shown as follow Attribute Name Unnamed Profile Location Depth 100 Segment per Curve 5 Direction Inward Color BYLAYER Hide No Display 3D 1 Profile The profile of wall hole is defined by a close 2D curve Contour lines are not allowed to intersect You can do the operation of Edit Cop
25. and then left click the objects of a entity you have loaded The entity will be broken apart into objects 9 5 12 Clone Object 1 Select Copy Object in the Products Library menu it will pop up a dialog box G bathroom01 a Bathroom01 qa 5 View Object 3 Material Q Lighting EP Apply v Bathroom02 1 bathroom01 2 Click My Proposal the file list will show preview of all the project files under the directory Click the preview the right window will show the panorama of the selected file User now can walk virtually in the scene 276 InteriCAD T5 User Manual ia bathroom01 a bathroom 1 View Object 18 Material Re Lighting E Apply bedroom 1 bathroom01 Functions of the 5 buttons e view Allow you to move freely but you can not select an object e Object Allow you to copy models into the scene The available models are in green and the selected models are in red Hold down Shift to select multi objects a Material Allow you to copy materials into the scene The selected surface is in flashing red Not support multi selection 4 Lighting Allow you to copy lighting elements into the scene The available light sources are in green and the selected light sources are in red Hold down Shift to select multi objects Multi selection is not supported e ZSApPliY Select Object in the Object mode turn to View mode to 277 Inter
26. input all required parameters and press OK bamboo Hariton Wall ype 9 Outline gt 3D Pattern A A B E WA Spacing 200 na Radius mm Cancel The type of Bamboo Partition Wall can be user defined Do as the followings 1 Select the curve to define the type of Bamboo Partition Wall 2 Select the base point of Bamboo Partition Wall 3 Select the boundaries These boundaries will define one or more closed areas 4 Click in an area to confirm the selected area 5 Select the projection point of the finishing 125 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 8 4 7 4 Tiling It is an often used decoration way to insert plates on a wall The system provides four types of plate which are square diamond pyramid and shield Basic operations 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Tiling 2 In the Plate dialog box select the required plate and set the number and thickness Press OK CIL Ed Type Square Thickness 50 Number Single Plate Insertion eae 3 There are two ways for inserting plates there are single plate insertion and multiple plates insertion e Single plate insertion 1 Specify the plate size For shield plate the value is in radius and for the other types of plate is in length 2 Select the center point and decide the position to insert plates 126 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Multiple plates insertion 1 Input the first corner point 2 Input the sec
27. materials cannot 2 All models using this material will change with it e You can move the mouse when editing material Click Move at the bottom of the dialogue box then you can move e Click Apply then the mouse changes to an oblique arrow That means the current material will be applied to the other models 2 Create a new material and apply it to other objects e Click the Select item in the material tool bar to distill the objects material e Switch to Basic label in the Material Editor Click New button and input a new name Click OK New Material Name of Material Copy europeanstyle05 Cancel e Click Apply item in the material tool bar and apply this new material to objects 3 Set color texture mapping for material There are two methods Method 1 e Click Select button and then Mapping select object s surface and pick mappingrile MANE Browse up all materials from that object e Switch to Color label and click Texture button concer The Mapping dialogue box appears Click Browse and select the image file in relevant directory Then click Ok Method 2 328 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Open a image browser by WINDOWS Explorer e Select the image e Drag and drop the selected image to object s surface and then the material will be automatically changed Conclusion Editing and applying of material is very simple e The first step is to click Material Editor e The second
28. 3 Before printing click Preview button 4 If you are not satisfied with the print out image please click Printing setting InteriCAD T5 User Manual button to adjust 5 Click Print button to print 6 Click Cancel button to exit 2 3 7 Print Setting Setup the paper size and layout landscape or portrait Basic operations Select File gt Print setting in menu bar And the Print setting dialogue box will appear In the square box you can adjust the paper size and layout landscape or portrait 2 3 8 Shortcut Setting Set shortcut for 2D design system Click File gt Shortcut setting in menu The system will display the Customize dialogue box Select the Group and Command define a shortcut in the New shortcut box and click Effect to confirm 2 3 9 Exit Select File gt Exit in the menu bar that means to exit 2D design system Note If the current file has been modified then it will display the Save dialogue box 2 4 Object Edit Function 2 4 1 Select Object When you need to move rotate copy delete an object you need to select it first You can either select one object in one time or select multiple objects in one time InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select one object in one time Select one command in Edit menu The mouse becomes a red square Now move the mouse to the object you want to select The object will be highlighted in yellow meaning the object has been selected Select multiple objects
29. 5 Normal 3 C Normal 4 2 In the popup Send Model Option dialogue box select the precision and combine option to export merge models 3 Select the objects you want to merge to VR 181 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 7 8 Import and Export DWG DXF Files InteriCAD can export and import and export dwg dxf files as well as importing 3ds files 7 8 1 Import 3DS File Use 3DSIN command to read 3D Studio geometric graph Options for importing 3DS file Save to layer To control how to allocate layer in 3DS file 1 By object To allocate a layer for each object in 3D Studio file The name of the layer is the same as the object By material To create a layer for each material in 3D Studio file All objects with same materials will be saved in one layer The name of the layer is the same as the material By object color To create layer for each color in 3D Studio file The name of the layer is COLORnn Nn is the color index of 3D Studio Object without color will be put on layer called COLORNONE Single layer to create a layer called AVLAYER All objects are put on this layer 2 Multiple Material Objects 3D Studio will allocate texture according to surface element or object BtoCAD will allocate texture according to object BtoCAD needs instruction when it allocates a 3D Studio object with multiple textures 182 Always prompt For every object with multiple textures a Material Assignment Alert dialogue box wi
30. AAA AA A Aa 336 S98 IM Perea EE TTT E TE TTE IT wens den adebee EAE 338 InteriCAD T5 User Manual OO MAC NAD ato seca ose hecte ans ache ahaa pace cde Coe turesaapenes teas dense eecesis dea genus maa cioneesnae outa eeoaee 338 SO TRESCE UD aaoo e E EEEE N ES EEA NESE 340 59 30 Random Maternal a E t 344 OOO WMS ASAS T T EE T 349 AA Pe o ee A 349 992 lr ad A Ee ONDE EET 331 29 93 APP TINE Pl cid 351 Ae Replace Misa arial 353 A T meee pint nee gm ee DE ere tea 353 O99 Ge EUS SILLAS A AN IS ds 355 S99 Duo o 355 SILO TS SEUA ES AD EA 356 SILO ING WL dad e a esc eeas 357 89 10 2 Clear LI A ao 357 MY A eee ree Ste rene Re ne en eee eer S 357 9 VO A SU A sade e E T E O a e 361 A A E gue Oebauet 367 SILOS MAA A oct doen E E E A A E EEE 368 SID Sma EEN SeN a a a mya meet eu pee neetentorre ners Mrmr Te 369 89 108 Special Lit asia 369 S9 OD eee 370 9 10 10Delete cia 370 A O isict sin ce atatet aa hosed O 370 9 ied Start Rad OSY ta Ni aida 370 S9 TEZ Raytrace amp Partial Ric 375 SOTLA SO A A E S ia cc id SoaetlEccean todo hancetleatteds 378 S9 IA Peon Rede O A aea 379 9 11 Instant Render Retreat A a a 379 OO LG 2560 ACK OTOUNG anat O dos e old id 379 SILLA LiehrAdjusiment avers sie a a E R E tee bealoweass 380 9 11 8 Light Adjustment without RAS id 381 09 AIO E0yronment SSNS aiiin i a a a Ea 382 OO STO RESCCARACIOSILY aea a aa cti tds 382 SOT EE PIOEATCA PIEVE Vona a E EE TEA EAEE TAE 383 SEEI Save Tia ena T 384
31. AAA a s 183 Chapter 8 Window Edit Attribute and Other FUNC LONS oooooooooonncnnncnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannoos 185 SSL Ai 185 A A A A EAE E AEE EE E 185 Sal CTOS ai a EA O T O TON 185 E O O 185 SO CA dada 185 SOc Tile HORIZON it IA A A A Ai 186 vi InteriCAD T5 User Manual A evera Cail santas Sadat eeae ahd Oi hut ane nines Oo haeceieanads Chena 186 COLL AAN GS ICONS rah Soviet savor lands LA A Ad medi Scsuasbeshine enous 187 5302 Lit cade 187 SO Uan Pane TOODA a SA AAA AE sa 187 3022 BOCAD Mi cisnes 187 98 23 General AA ET re TER Mn ee eve 187 Le Display Or OD o e e AO AER UE lt pnsaseedatpate E ASS 189 So SUMMA OF Edit AUD laa sida 189 Sl ACME IA is 189 86 3 2 Dialos BOXR OL Edit AUDI Sil A AAA AAA id 189 3 3 3 Attribute Edit amp Common Operation is 190 Sot COMMON AIDU S cc d das E OAN E a 192 Saa IP setaebanlans snnea tenbatan eascitanautanten eitacesa eater earesaes 194 8 3 6 Doors amp Windows Attribute Edit coocccnccnoccnoccnoconoconoconocnnccnnccnnrcnaronoronconiconicono 196 So Wood Eme Attribute Edita iii 197 Saano Wall Ole Attribute Pda did 199 S84 A A Seamsaian a eansdatvennat incase deaataonen ene 200 SGA ISLE prin Zane E A IAS E AA bites AAA A A A lencice 200 q A A PO EEEE OR Poe 201 Chapter 9 Vittual RS SAA sesame cae eine 201 BE OVEN le Wiese se uzsaie se aseu ven cee a a nehaue sa net a a atane ease eed uamieae weeoieeaeeniees 201 9 2 InteriCAD VR In
32. BA Libr ary maintain Pu EAN E E system library a a Common o El 3 2D library E 3D library El 3 desk E le 7 office desk 3 dining tablel if al dining table2 a meeting table a toilet lt j tee table 1 ify tee table 2 a reception table i shop counter a other E ver cabinet Titee table 8 Similar to the sofa selecting determine Insertion point and Rotate angle The selecting of the tea table is completed Example selecting the door To select a door select the point which the door is to be placed a Double click door and window door gt wood door in the list area b Drag the sliding bar in the preview area to find the required door style 164 InteriCAD T5 User Manual rr ary maintain E system library 3 Common 3 Door Windows El O door 7 wood door 1 F door F door wood door 2 3 3 wood door 3 3 3 wood door 4 3 a aluminum door 1 E aluminum door 2 f C door Ciwood Ciwood Ciwood ia 3 chinese classic door door door A E partition door 2 door knop Q window hd LA E Er Ciwood CJwood Clwood y 80 objects Current is D MGX ACAD LIB ADDOLO TEETABLE J TO3 dwg Y c Double click the symbol of that door style the parameter dialogue box of the door popup Set the width height and ground clearance Press Enter d Insert the door using positioning mode of door and windows e After the position of the door is fixed the system pro
33. InteriCAD T5 User Manual example the mirror effect of the material is too strong you can modify the property of the material directly In addition in the scene only the target spot light and day light that can calculate direct lighting will function Adjust the setting of the ambient light and it will change the effect intensity of target spot light and day light e From the Render menu select Environment Setting O Set corresponding parameter in the appeared dialogue box Ambient light intensity is displayed in scientific counting method The default value is 5E 005 If you want to increase the ambient light you can adjust the value to 1E 004 so that the light intensity can be increase Environment Setting Ambient Shinning 38 005 Ground Brightness Factor 1 Cancel O Save the final result until you are satisfied with the effect Photon Map Raytrace Based on the original Raytrace the new Photon Map Raytrace has made in rendering a comprehensive upgrade It brings a complete elimination of interference and light leak simplifying operation and reducing the difficulty of modeling The table below is the comparison of the two Raytrace Photon Map Raytrace Can be performed before and after Can only be performed after radiosity radiosity Need more time to render a clean Do not need to render a clean scene scene Radiosity is the main calculation first Ratrace is the main calculation process process 377 Int
34. No 1 Livingroom plan38 Livingroom planl4 uto Change Color No 2 Livingroom plan31 Livingroom plan0T Select room No 3 Livingroom plan30 Livingroom plan06 No 4 Livingroom plan29 Livingroom plan05 No 5 Livingroom plan28 Livingroom planl4 No 6 Livingroom plan27 Livingroom plan03 ada tala Ol selo lele No T Livingroom plan26 Livingroom plan02 No 8 Livingroom plan25 Livingroom plan0l r Aa 345 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Learn how to change color of a single object e Right click any object and select Change Color option from the popup menu Ceiling Surface Wall Surface Ground Surface Change Color Select Map Restore origin meterial Clear map e Now the panel automatically switches for color changing Intelligent Color El Color cycle y Color cycle e Click Auto Change Color to cycle color and you can also activate saturation and lightness to change e Click Stop button to stop auto change color and you can also drag slider to change color using the mouse 3 Learn how to change texture map for a single object e Right click the object surface and choose Select Map menu A dialogue box appears asking you to select a directory Ceiling Surface Wall Surface Ground Surface Change Color Restore origin meterial Clear map o After selecting corresponding directory a dialogue box appears The dialogue box is similar to Expert match color dialogue
35. Otherwise you can only arrange lamps on the circumference Odd even When this option is active you can arrange lamps in odd even mode in the radius direction of the circle Otherwise the lamps will be arranged orderly Radius the radius of the lamps Lamps outer the number of lamps along the outer circumference Lamps inner the number of lamps along the inner circumference Inner radius the radius of the inner circle Outer radius the radius of the outer circle Free Curve Radius the radius of the lamps Number the number of lamps along the polyline Single arrange a single lamp System command prompt Line Pick two points on the drawing as the endpoints of the line route Rectangle Pick a point as the lower left point of the rectangle InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Fan Shape Pick a point as the center of the circle e Circle Pick a point as the center of the circle e Free Curve Select the polyline e Point Specify a point 4 System asks whether to make 3D lamp e Press N or Enter no 3D lamp will be generated e Press Y the Complete Installation dialogue box popup And in this dialogue box you can set the data of the lamp refer to at any height for more information and then the 3D lamp will be generated 4 8 2 2 Convert to 3D at Any Height Change the lamp icon on the plane ceiling drawing into 3D recess down light and arrange them at any height Basic operations 1 Select Convert to 3D at a
36. Room 79 O MO0 O BYLAYER y BylLayer y Bylayer Left View C cafe gt o3 R 2 QGBR HL Bk op View Isometric View Ka Pd 4uUmND RISAS Ne be E x 2 O O if O B po O D raj A ld 4 lis Model Comnand FILTER loaded Command Command Command 4 4 RTHO Polar OSNAP OTRACK LWT M Layoutl Ready Menu Bar Where software commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button Tool Bar Where most common commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button 82 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Drawing Window The area where you can make drawings The system defaults as a four view form The one in the left upper corner is front view in the left lower corner is top view in the right upper corner is side view and in the right lower corner is isometric view Command Window The place where you can input commands Status Bar Display cursor coordinate and mode status Construction Graph Screen Menu Most common Construction Graph commands 4 2 Grid on Axis Grid on axis can provide the reference for locating and quickly build up the walls 4 2 1 Grid on Axis Grid line on axis includes orthogonal grid on axis and oblique grid on axis The vertical and horizontal axes of the orthogonal grid on axis are perpendicular while the axes of oblique grid on axis intersect each other with an angle not eq
37. Select the objects you want to export to VR 3 Define the observer point to export Note The export method is suggestted while you have placed some complex models from the CAD library System will automatically replace them with the 3d models while exporting to VR 7 5 Export Merge lf there is same model in Virtual Reality using this command will replace the model in modeling library with the model in Virtual Reality library Basic Operations 1 Select Virtual Realty gt Export merge 2 Select the objects you want to merge to VR 3 Define the observer point to export 7 6 Advanced Export This is another way to export 3D models into Virtual Reality Basic Operations 1 Select Virtual Reality gt Advanced Export 180 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Option Combine option Normal No combine 5 Normal 1 Same layer 5 Normal 2 Same color C Normal 3 C Normal 4 2 In the popup Send Model Option dialogue box select the precision and combine option to export models 3 Select the objects you want to export to VR Note Normal Normal 1 Normal 2 controls the precision level for the objects especially for circle arc etc 7 Advanced Export Merge This is another way to export 3D models into Virtual Reality and Merge Basic Operations 1 Select Virtual Realty gt Advanced Export Merge Option Combine option Normal No combine 5 Normal 1 Same layer 5 Normal 2 Same color
38. T5 User Manual Basic operations Draw two connected lines first Select Arc in the Draw menu and fillet from arc parameter dialog Set value of radius and click ok Left click to select two connected lines You will see the fillet of these two lines Define two points as the radius Function Draw an arc by setting two points as the radius Basic operations Select Arc in the Draw menu and define two points as the radius from arc parameter dialog Set value of radius and click ok Left click the mouse in the workspace for the start point Move the mouse and left click to define the second point Move the mouse beside the connecting line of these two points and left click to finish Define the start point radius and angle Function Draw an arc on a line Basic operations Draw a line first Select Arc in the Draw menu and define the start point radius and angle from arc parameter dialog Set the values of radius and angle and click ok Select a node on the line as the start point Move the mouse and left click in the workplace to define direction 2 6 3 Circle Function Draw a circle on the current workspace floor Basic operations 1 Select Circle in the Draw menu 2 Left click on the workspace to place the center of the circle 3 Move the mouse to enlarge or reduce the circle You can see the radius of the circle in displacement 16 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 Left click the mouse to finish drawing 2 6 4 Po
39. The default size of wall thickness is 120mm 4 When you move the mouse the length and angle of wall will be shown in the Base dialogue box You can enter a figure as the Length and Enter The wall will be generated 5 You could also left click for the second point of wall Now one piece of wall has been created Move the mouse to draw the second one The ending point of first piece of wall is the starting point of the second piece of wall You can continue this operation till you finish drawing the rooms Once all walls are created right click Note you can use the snap function to locate the wall accurately 24 2 7 3 Function Insert door and window Door and Window Basic operations InteriCAD T5 User Manual Insert Door Window and Column 1 Select Room structure gt Door and window Door and window Type Window Sliding door Bay window Single door Folding door Wall hole Double door Arcadia door width w Height H 2000 Elevation E 0 Add door window frame Door Stone cancel 2 Select different type of door and window Define its dimension elevation frame and door sills Click OK Left click on the piece of wall where you want to insert the door The 2D sample of door will move alone the wall with the movement of mouse You can press Space to change open left right of the door and move the mouse to change it facing inside outside of the door exit
40. a My Sharing Folders File name Files of type 2 Inthe popup dialogue box browse for the koc file 3 Define whether to generate solid wall and the height of the room STD Import Import option Generate Solid Wall Room height 3000 4 The system will automatically generate what you have made in 2d to modeling 184 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Chapter 8 Window Edit Attribute and Other Functions 8 1 Window 8 1 1 New Window This funciton is used for creating new window in the modeling mode Select New Window trom the Window menu 8 1 2 Close This funciton is used for closing the current window in the drawing Select Close from the Window menu 8 1 3 Close All This funciton is used for closing all the windows in the drawing Select Close All from the Window menu 8 1 4 Cascade This funciton is used for arranging the windows in the drawing Select Cascade from the Window menu and window will be showed as below 185 InteriCAD T5 User Manual File Draw Edit Structure Door Window Elevation Ceiling Floor 3DModel Dimension Virtual Reality Window Other La ig a B2 E EA RA FE B Room v E O BYLAYER y ByLayer ll oaao DEBAS BE ZIE 4 oo P a EN Drawingl S a gt A P a o EN Drawing2 al a gg i st go O gw 3 5 ed o H 2 n op View Isometric View co A A ld 41 1 Model
41. a time the system provides a series of tile plans taking advantages of basic tiling modes including instances of each basic tiling mode Parametric plan Basic operations 1 Pave Tiles Plan 2 Select Parametric plan 3 Choose a tiling mode in the dialog box and then click the Select button to choose a tile in the database 66 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Parametric plan Floor plan wall plan Tile planning method C Single tile Select tile 1 Select tile 2 Use tle has same ID YF 40002 0 1081671680 YFE40009 0 1081671680 to fill entire area Staggered tile planning Staggered filling entire area with two kinds of tiles have same spec but different ID Select small tile Borderline Embed small tiles ect small tiles V Set border line Select tile Distance Embed small tile into big tile YFX003 0 108 1262080 Apply to the area Cancel 4 There are options for embedding little tile and board line Click the Select button to choose a tile in the database if necessary 5 Click Apply to region button and then left click on target region 6 Left click a point to specify the base point The slices will be automatically cut by the region border Floor Plan Basic operations DEA SN a Pave gt Tiles Plan Choose Floor Plan Choose an item from the catalogue and then double click on target plan Left click on target region Left click a point to specify the
42. all required parameters and press OK 122 InteriCAD T5 User Manual DbamMbCO racing Batten Veneer Combined batten Semicircular bamboo rod Bamboo rod User Define Spacing Back Panel Thickness 3 The type of Bamboo Facing can be user defined Do as the followings 1 Select the curve to define the type of Bamboo Facing 2 Select the base point of Bamboo Facing 3 Select the boundaries These boundaries will define one or more closed areas 4 Click in an area to confirm the selected area 5 Select the projection point of the finishing 4 7 3 5 Concrete Partition Wall 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Concrete Partition Wall 2 Inthe Concrete Partition Wall box input all required parameters and press 123 InteriCAD T5 User Manual OK concrete Ranitionwall 5 C D E F G H Thickness Cancel The type of Concrete Partition Wall can be user defined Do as the followings 1 Select the curve to define the type of Concrete Partition Wall 2 Select the base point of Concrete Partition Wall 3 Select the boundaries These boundaries will define one or more closed areas 4 Click in an area to confirm the selected area 5 Select the projection point of the finishing 4 7 3 6 Bamboo Partition Wall 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Bamboo Partition Wall 124 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 In the Bamboo Partition Wall dialog box
43. all servers please restart the command on both sides 9 12 Animation To make animation is one of current trends InteriCAD VR provides simple but practical functions of making animation System provides totally 5 methods of making animation 1 Record the condition that walking with the mouse 2 Seta polyline as the path of the camera The orientation of the camera lens keeps the same as that of the tangent line of the polyline 3 Set two polylines one as the path of the camera and the other as the path of the target point 396 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 Set a polyline as the path of the camera Set a fixed point as the target point 5 Set path in the top view of vender workspace These 5 methods of setting animation have their own advantages The third and fourth methods are recommended Method 1 this method is the freest and the most visualized But it is hard to use the mouse smoothly When preview the animation you can see that the picture dithering is big Method 2 this method is easy to realize But there will still be picture dithering atthe position of polyline arc Method 3 The setting is relatively complex as you have to draw two polylines But the picture basically doesn t dither Method 4 the picture is fluent and is suitable for the animation of single object or furniture decoration plan Method 5 easy to realize 9 12 1 Record 1 Single click Record button o 2 Then you can walk in the scen
44. basin to 1 3 After using raytrace this white wash basin will appear to be more bright and limpid Use an image file to the object e g marble material This texture supports file dragging operation It currently supports three image file format jog bmp and tif 9 8 1 3 Reflection Label 325 9 8 1 4 326 Reflection Smoothness Gloss Gloss Size Texture InteriCAD T5 User Manual Material Editor Base Color Reflection Transparency Stencil Bump 4 Reflection vo _ Smoothness 10 00 l Gloss 0 or Gloss Size 30 0 001 gt 1000 Texture None Inverse Raytrace Max W Global f Select C Apply Move lt can be viewed in the mirror that it reflects other objects This feature is called mirror reflection Value 1 means pure mirror and value O means it has no reflection feature It means the smoothness level of an object surface This parameter is only valid when the reflection level is not 0 It is used to make the effect of diffuse reflection Usually the value is from 0 1 to 0 4 In default setting the value has connection with Gloss and Gloss Size To deactivate can do separate setting Used to adjust the reflection intensity of specula material The larger the value the stronger the reflection Used to adjust the reflection scope The larger the value the wider the scope Use texture mapping to control the reflection area You can create some special effect
45. black display region on the left indicates the division status of the tile region It is initialised to be a single region when the dialogue box pops up The component parts are divided by the skirt waist line and upper decorative line No upper decorative line can be fixed if there is no waist line in the wall surface 5 By tick selecting the division lines the component parts can be decided The black display region can show the division status instantly 6 After the division you should select ceramic slices for each part or titling modes or elevation Click a certain component part to be edited The system automatically searches for the region and shows it in highlight In the blank region under the Components the Region Parameters controller group appears 7 Click Select lt button quit the dialogue box Select the ceramic slice for the corresponding region of the selected plan and then it returns to the dialogue box again In the black display region if manufacturer and code 70 InteriCAD T5 User Manual of the ceramic are shown it indicates that the ceramic is selected successfully 8 Select the titling mode straight or oblique When oblique titling the selected ceramic is rotated 45 degree If the operation region is the waist line then the elevation should be input or picked by the cursor 9 Repeat step 6 8 until all components of the wall surface have selected with the ceramic and the parameters have been set 10 C
46. choose Interval straight tiling in shortcut menu There are two interval modes in the pop up dialog box Interval mode of tile quantity and Interval mode of distance Please note that by choosing the Interval mode of distance the width of slice gap is already included After selecting the interval mode and interval value click OK button 57 58 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Tile spacing Please define space between ceramic Horizontal spacing Cancel G Space between ceramic 1 Piece Space between ceramic Vertical spacing e Space between ceramic 1 Piece Space between ceramic lt Note gt If ceramic space is not defined by quantity then set spacing to distance between edge of two tiles including tile width By moving the mouse the system will show the tilling dynamically by a square box with the same size to that ceramic The ceramics will be tiled along the two sides of the selected one by the ceramic size and interval value The tiling mode is to spread the ceramics in horizontal and vertical directions until the cursor position and the system will automatically work out the ceramic quantity required Press the F key then it will tile the whole region by the current tiling mode Hooda oooad oooa ooog A Drag mode B Select mode Left click in an appropriate position and then the tiles will be tiled according to the dragging status before final selecting New tiles will be cut automatically acco
47. creating a Plinth a warn dialogue box will pop up and ask user whether to delete the manually generated Plinth when auto generating a Plinth 298 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 6 8 Create Pelmet 9 6 8 1 Style of Pelmet Select the Kitchen Design gt Parameter setting menu In the popup Parameter Setting dialogue box you can set the required style of Pelmet 9 6 8 2 Auto Create Pelmet After selecting the command the system will search for all the installed wall cupboards and automatically arrange the selected style of Pelmet on them according to their relevant position and size etc Basic operations 1 Select the Kitchen Design gt Create Pelmet menu 2 The system will automatically install the Pelmet on all the wall units 9 6 9 Create Cornice 9 6 9 1 Style of the Cornice Select the Kitchen Design gt Parameter Settings menu In the pop up Parameter Settings dialogue box you can select the style of the Cornice required by the user 9 6 9 2 Auto Create Cornice lf this command is applied the system will first search all the installed wall cupboards and then automatically install the selected style of Cornice above them according to their relative positions and sizes etc Basic operations 1 Select the Kitchen Design gt Create Cornice menu 2 The system will automatically install the Cornice above all the wall units 299 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 6 10 Change Handle Change all doors and drawers
48. function is only available in network version Preparation 1 All involved computers at least two should be installed InteriCAD T5 2 Authorization code of Net Render module is required for all involved computers 3 All involved computers should be in the same network segment and same group for example the IP should be 192 168 1 xx 4 Make sure all involved computers could be able to connect to each other and Render exe would not be blocked by firewall or any antivirus program Operations 1 Divide all involved computers into two parts set one as mater and all the other as server 2 Run Render Net Render Server on all servers and give a unique user name for each server Click Modify button to update 3 Open a mrs file on master perform Radiosity and then run Render Net Render Monitor 395 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Submit network render request Update server list Render 9 00 dP Status Times Version Total Times Local Host 192168 5 5 1 Times 100090953 40 Set scan times Times here Click this button if no server can be displayed in the list Start rendering Click this button to set image size Current status and Raytrace Max Depth lt Setting Exit Ww Local host Result 4 Click Start rendering button Note 1 Ifit s the first time to run Net Render module system may ask you whether to block it or not please choose unblock 2 If master cannot send the project to
49. generates the ceiling framework 2 8 3 Ceiling Block 28 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Function generate individual ceiling in the framed rectangle area Basic operations 1 Click Ceiling Block in the Ceiling menu 2 Move the mouse cursor to the workspace and you can see a prompt asking you to determine the ceiling framework s First point Click the left button at a proper position to determine the first point Move the mouse to another position lt appears a white preview framework for determining the range of individual ceiling and a prompt asking to determine the Second point Here it dynamically displays the displacement between the two points According to the variation of the white preview framework click at a proper position to determine an area for generating the individual ceiling In the popup Ceiling setting dialogue box set the shape and elevation of the ceiling In the Individual ceiling option click Select button and then choose a proper ceiling shape from the ceiling library So you can quickly build a ceiling with complex structure If you select the other you will get the simple one Remember to change the elevation It must different from the elevation of the ceiling framework Ceiling settings p Ceiling Shape 00 0mm 30 00D Elevation 2800 a Meanwhile set the elevation of the ceiling framework default elevation is 2800mm Press OK then the system generates the ceiling in the selected c
50. ic O O 153 Soot o talircase Base On TWO LAME A id 157 85 43 Staircase Base on Center Lane A A A A a 158 InteriCAD T5 User Manual O 160 5 5 Visual Library Management Based on Database ManageMent oocccccccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 161 Sl Startup Library Mana de Meta 161 S552 Library Manas ement Lai ASA AAA A AE sa 161 0 HOM to US LIA ld a dla 162 85 574 System Manase Mo io 162 85 5 5 User Management Modenan ds 167 Chap tet o Dimens Oi a AND id 169 SG MDM eMSIOM is 169 SOL Dimension On LAA CACA St Basle iaa 169 SOA ros AA A A EN 170 6 1 3 Walls with Windows DIMENSION occooccnccnnccnnccnnccnoconiconoconoconoconocnnncnoronaronronaconoconicons 170 6 1 4 Door and Windows DIMENSION cooccnccnnccnnccnnccnoconoconoconoconoconoconocnnccnnronronaronaconoconicono 171 SOLO Modify Axis N o 171 SOLO THEATER AAOS 172 So Dimension PESA dia A s 172 0 13 Common Dimension DES 172 Chapter 7 Virtual Reality Commands in Modeling cccccccccnnnnnnnooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanoss 174 es E A a A N N EA O 174 Sa Advanced Lis hn AAA AAA E ods 174 SS a eddie 179 SA O sere wscseorecae Ala iat aa Sa tu casos Ssh IP lawl Slee aids Sell ell unl eee wis bcp REN oust Se DRaaN wate 180 C7 EPO A E 180 SFO Adyanced EXPO acom lA s 180 Git Advanced Export Nero ias si tenes 181 7 8 Import and Export DWG DXF Files oeuse E EAE E EE a EAs 182 Sol APO DS Eer n espi 182 S29 TMPO D Des Ln TIES ai SA eta ean
51. in one time You can use region selection to select more than one object 2 4 2 Undo After executing some wrong operations you can use Undo command to return to the previous operation There is no limit to the times of undo Basic operations Select Undo in the Edit menu using the left button or click button in the tool bar 2 4 3 Redo After executing the Undo command you can use Redo command to cancel that operation Basic operations Select Redo in the Edit menu 2 4 4 Move The command can move one or more objects in one time which is usually used to adjust one set of furniture Basic operations 1 Click Move in the Edit menu or click ES button in the tool bar 2 Click the object to be moved and the selected object will display a node with highlighted yellow color 3 After selecting click the right button to finish the current operation 4 Follow the instruction click to choose the start point Then move the 10 InteriCAD T5 User Manual mouse At the same time it shows the relative displacement dynamically Note you can simultaneously select and move multiple objects the difference to the operation of moving an object and the latter can only move one object 2 4 5 Rotate The command can rotate one or more objects in one time which is usually used to adjust a set of furniture Basic operations 1 Click Rotate in the Edit menu or click button in the tool bar 2 According to th
52. inclination between the square column and the base line e Size Z the height of the square column The default value is 3000 mm 3 Drag the mouse and select an area using window mode All the intersection points of the grid on axis stayed in this scope will be marked with a cross and a square column will be generated in every position of the cross Right click to finish operation I Note in the intersection point of the grid line on axis the column will adjust the rotation angle based on the axis with a smaller slope The column in the intersection point of the grid on center will adjust the rotation angle according to the radial direction axis automatically 4 5 2 Round Column on Axis Insert the round column according to the gird on axis The dimension of the round column can be defined in the Round Column dialogue box 102 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Column Offset Delta_X Diameter 600 Delta_Y z 3000 Please refer to the Square Column dialogue box for detail information about the meaning and function of each field of the dialogue box Inserting round column on axis is similar to square column 4 5 3 Freestanding Square Column The location of the column is flexible and more columns can be generated at one time Basic operations 1 Select Square Column from the Structure menu and then Freestanding 2 Input the parameters in the Square Column dialogue box Press OK 3 Select the location point
53. is 382 InteriCAD T5 User Manual return to the status before radiosity from the status after radiosity For example if you find that the orientation of some faces is wrong then you need return to the status before radiosity to adjust the obverse reverse as the following operations e Select Reset Radiosity command from Render menu e Click Yes in the popup dialog box 89 11 11 Plot Area Preview This shows how the image will look when it is saved Basic operations e Select Plot Area Preview command from Render menu a dialogue box will pops up Save Image Preview Image Size Usage Preview e Choose an image size in the pull down menu of Usage or choose User Defined to specify the image size manually e Tick Preview option and click OK button the size of the printing image will be changed 383 InteriCAD T5 User Manual D IGXVR F irender smart lightidra File View Products Library Object Mater ial Tiling Light Setting Render Animation Optim Help VEn tele Ja galeja 212 Command setpreview Command EA e To exit the preview status run Plot Area Preview command again unpick the Preview option and click OK button 9 11 12 Save Image e Move to a proper position with satisfactory view angle e Single click the Save Image button or select Save Image from Render menu e Determine the path and file name in the popup dialogue box e Determine the resolution of the effect dra
54. lo con To put this furniture on the top of the other furniture you can either enter a new elevation Or click Selected to select the furniture which is under the furniture Left clicking Cancel will exit the edit menu 2 9 2 Furniture Set Function To create furniture set Basic operations 1 Click Furniture Set Right click and select Insert Node to add a new node E Furniture Sets i bedRoom Insert Node gt diningRoo Add to library fivingRoo Delete Node 34 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Create a new set Select the category and right click on the preview area Enter the name of new furniture set Click OK El Furniture Sets bedRoom diningRoom livingRoom 3 Next select the furniture to add to a set Right click and the furniture set is added into the library 2 10 Setting Menu 2 10 1 Display Mode Function There are two modes to be selected one is filling and the other is wire frame Basic operations 1 Click the Display mode in the Setting menu A Display Mode dialogue box pop up 2 Default is Texture Mode The furniture will be of more reality if you select Filling mode 35 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Image Display Mode There are two optional modes Filling Wirefrane 3 Selecting the mode of wire frame you can see all objects are showed by wire frame It not only can promote the speed of display but save the
55. menu and then choose Change name command in it 2 Enter a new name in the dialog box 3 Click OK button the region name has been changed Note New name should be different from any existing region name in current drawing 3 3 5 3 Change Slice Gap Basic operations 1 Right click on a region to display the shortcut menu and then choose Change slice gap command in tt 2 Enter a new value of slice gap width in the dialog box the unit of measurement is millimeter mm 3 Click OK buiton the slice gap width will be changed Note Modified slice gap width can only be applied to new tiles Existing ones will remain unchanged So it is strongly recommended that the slice gap width should be set before paving 48 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 3 5 4 Clean Slice Basic operations 1 Right click on a region to display the shortcut menu and then choose Clean slice command in it 2 All existing tiles in this region will be removed 3 3 5 5 Boolean Operation Basic operations 1 Right click on a region to display the shortcut menu and then choose a Boolean operation command Combine regions Region subtract and Region intersect in it 2 Click on another region to execute Boolean operation The Boolean operation results are as below 1 Original state 2 Region intersect 49 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 Region subtract 4 Combine regions 3 4 Paving in a Region The core of ceramic mod
56. new plan 3 Click New plan button in Plan operation area 4 Input plan name and comment in the dialog box and then click Select slices button Floor tile planning design Name not named Note Choose the ceramic in the mode lt Not select ceramic 5 According to the prompt specify tiles and paving direction Please refer to Free tiling 6 After selecting additional slice press right button or ESC key on keyboard to finish selection 7 Choose a tile in current selection as the base point of this plan 8 The dialog box pops up again Click OK button to save this plan Wall Plan The tile plan of walls is different from that of floors The main difference is that the tile of walls can be selectively divided into multiple regions Generally the division lines of a wall surface are skirt board at the bottom of the wall waist line in the middle and upper decorative line at the top The tile plan of walls focuses on the division of the region For each region only two tiling modes Straight Tiling and Oblique Tiling are provided to avoid garish titling effect Operations 1 Select Wall Plan 2 Choose a group to add new plan 3 Click New plan button in Plan operation area 4 The Tile plan of walls dialog box pops up 69 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Design for wall tile planning Name not named Note Component Plinth Chair rail Cancel The dialogue box has three main parts The
57. of inputting or saving are similar indicates the multiplication sign If the format is improper the data cannot be saved For example 300 60 is a legal input while 3e0 60 is a illegal 78 InteriCAD T5 User Manual input The Price must be a number There is only Piece option provided for the Unit column so you cannot change it The Picture column may be empty User can input the corresponding picture path for the product by himself or click the button on the right side of the column select the file name of corresponding picture in the popup file dialogue box and then click the Open button so that the ceramic picture has been specified Note 1 Two ceramic records with the same manufacture and code are not allowed to exist in the database 2 You should set in the Columns button as all the columns will be displayed to avoid missing the modification to the newly added item 3 9 3 Modify Ceramic Information in Database Browse the data window to find out the ceramic record to be modified Select the column to be modified and then modify it directly in the data window The modified data will be automatically saved to the database 3 9 4 Delete Ceramic Record from Database Select record 1 2 3 4 5 Browse the data window to find out the ceramic record to be modified Select one record by click on it Hold the Ctrl key while clicking other records to do multiple selection and then these records will al
58. of the exported bitmap There is a rectangle This is the export area of the bitmap Define a rectangle area using the left click and that is the range for exporting a jpg file The system will show export image dialogue box where the dpi and size of the export bitmap can be modified Click Export button and then select the file path and file name to be saved InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 3 6 Print Print the plot drawing This function is the same as Print function in Navigation panel Basic operations Click File gt Printin menu bar 1 2 The system will display the Print dialogue box There are three ways you can choose e Whole image area print all content in the current view port e Choose scope print certain items in the current view port Press Choose button First left click to indicate a corner of rectangle and then move the mouse to the proper position to indicate the other corner on the cross All objects inside the rectangle will be printed e Choose frame _ print the content within one frame Note You have to insert a frame before you use this function As for how to insert a frame please refer to command introduction of Insert image frame Print precision define the precision of the printed image High precision means high definition and quality Position define the position in the paper to print the image Select User defined to offset Ratio Scale ratio compare to the real dimension
59. point and end point of the wall What involves here is the modification of the wall s appearance not the direct modification of the wall s 91 InteriCAD T5 User Manual parameters System provides a set of comprehensive tools for wall editing Update Move endpoint Break Trim Cut Extend Fillet offset and Trim corner 4 3 2 1 Update During the design process you often apply operations to the wall such as adding or removing a door or a window All these operations may ruin the integrity of the wall After editing there may be some defects displayed on the screen When this happens you can use Update command to return to normal Basic operations 1 Select Wall from Structure menu then Edif Update 2 Select the wall to be updated and press Enter As shown a door has been deleted from the wall but the door s outline is still on the wall For addition another straight wall has been moved to intersect with it All these lead to the error display of the intersection graphic After using update command the actual graphic of the wall is shown on the right side of the picture below 4 3 2 2 Change Endpoint This function is to change the start point and end point of the wall It is valid only for straight wall The changing of curve wall s endpoint can be done with tools such as extending and trimming Basic operations 92 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Select Wall from Structure menu then Edit Move endpoint 2
60. scale i s Keep onginal scale 3 HSE a Horizontal match the height of wal Es Specify furniture Input proportion to fumiture Input zoom scale Input height Input height that can wrap Open 5 Finally click Add button to add the new rule Pick up lt fumiture Tce 236 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Are you sure to add rule Place block lt TV cabinet gt on lt On back a wall gt Furniture lt C InteriCADT3 VR vrlib Fnewl picgrp12 2 mrm gt elevation is lt 0 gt Horizontal lt Keep original size gt Vertial lt Keep original scale gt Specify furniture You can define a model mrm file for the relative furniture type either selecting from the library or your own models they should be mrm format Create template Bay window GridDoor Wall hole Ground Ceiling Ceiling cornice E Chair rail Skirting a Base board loficefunture y pS 7 Lamp Appoint Model office tumiture or gt User defined rule Specify furniture Open 1 4 am al ima 9 3 11 Save Mvr Save Mvr file for VRViewer which is in mvr file format Basic operations 1 Click Render gt Start Radiosity to run radiosity first 2 Click File gt Save Mvr in menu bar A Save as dialogue box will appear In dialogue box choose the file path and 237 InteriCAD T5 User Manual input the name of the file then click Save button 9 3 12 Slope Ceiling From th
61. select the defined object of BtoCAD object editor of BtoCAD should be used while you select the defined object of InteriCAD System the Edit Attribute should be used And this chapter will focus on the latter one In CAD modeling of the design system objects that can be applicable to Edit Attribute include wall doors amp windows wood line and wall hole etc 8 3 1 Start the Edit Attribute Here are three different methods to start the Edit Attribute e Inout the command MGXEA e Click the Edit Attribute button in the toolbar of InteriCAD T5 8 3 2 Dialog Box of Edit Attribute After starting the Edit Attribute select an object and then a dialog box of Edit Attribute will popup The main control functions are as follow e Attribute List all the attributes of the selected object and current parameter of every attribute 189 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Edit correspond to the editing operation of the attribute e Copy correspond to the copying operation of the attribute Extract use to extract the parameter of the attribute Every attribute has its own operations Suppose you select an attribute in the Attribute system can only generate the applicable operations while the functional button of inapplicable one will turn gray Dialog box of Edit Attribute is shown as follow Attribute Name Unnamed Starting Point 9016 4136 0 Ending Point 495 4136 0 Wall Height 3000 Wall Thickness 120 Filling Option
62. select the object and press F12 will enable you to replace the object in the same dimensions 9 5 13 Export Clone Object 1 Open a rendered VR scene put camera to the right position 2 Click Products Library on the menu select Export Clone Object The default save path is IntericadT5 vr showroom My Proposal 3 Click Output button it will be saved as a panorama file with record of the mrm files into the project file 9 5 14 Furniture List Select Furniture List from Products Library The system will automatically list all the products and generate the List You can now check the price size quantity etc 279 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Hoe 10 40d La la redo id ele export export export print preview setting undo ote template Furniture List YFCAD Software corner CORNE sofaD11 SOFA Copy Rights Guangzhou YuanFang Computer Software Engineering Co Ltd txt export Export the list to text format In the popup dialogue designate the location and input the file name Then click OK List separator Use semicolon to separate Use two contineous space to separate Use comma to separate Co Use to separate Define separator Save data format File name html H0 Export the list to HTML format In the popup dialogue designate the location and input the file name Then click Save 280 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Save in Es Documents 7 q E A Name Date
63. serial number code and manufacturer These three items can not be changed Basic operations 1 Press the Columns button or press the function key F4 and it pops up the Column setting dialogue box 2 Inthe data window of the dialogue box it lists all the names of property columns Click the left square box by the left button The Y symbol indicates the display status and the corresponding column will be displayed in the data window 3 Select the name of one property column press the left button and hold it to 80 InteriCAD T5 User Manual drag this property item Here a dragging bar will be displayed When the dragging bar moves to an appropriate position release the button and then that property item will be moved to the position of the dragging bar In the same way you can change the order of other properties 4 After setting press the OK button to validate the modification If you press the Cancel button then it will abort the modification and exit 3 9 7 Sort and Column Replace The Sort and Column Replace is an additional function and the system doesn t provide corresponding function buttons for them You can activate the function by right button Sort Specify the ceramic property column to be sorted and left click on the table head in the data window and then the sort function is activated and the sort arrows are also displayed on the corresponding table head The upward arrow indicates to sort by an asce
64. sideboard or not and yes the position and dimension of the sideboard Accessories whether to set the carpet and side proofing bar if yes the dimension of them e Sideline whether to set the sideline or not if yes the dimension of the sideline 3 Click Insert Point button to determine the base point of the 154 InteriCAD T5 User Manual stairs 4 Press OK and the staircase will be generated automatically as shown below 5 Draw a rectangle in the top view and select Flat Platform from Combine Stairs menu Select the rectangle and input the thickness to build the flat platform 6 Then copy two staircases and a flat platform Gop C Down 155 156 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select Assemble Stair from Combine Stairs menu The Stair Assembly dialogue box will define the object that will be used as reference part or assembly part and determines the position where the reference part will be assembled and the alignment of the two parts eo Reference Part the object that will remain static during assembling e Assembly Part the object that will move during assembling Click Select Reference Part select object 1 Click Select Assembly Part button select object A Click Assemble button press Spacebar to adjust the plane assemble position of the staircase and flat platform to a proper position and press Enter Then take flat platform A as the reference part staircase 2 as the assembly part Repea
65. step is to choose the required material e The third step is to switch to corresponding label and modify relevant parameters e The forth step is to apply this material to other object s surface Common materials and special materials edit 1 Common materials edit There are some common materials in real life such as glass metal wood plastic and leather etc these materials have their own typical features For example glass is transparent and can be used to mirror In the Material Editor dialogue box these objects have been initially classified The editor is an easy to use tool as long as you select material type from it the system will automatically set detailed parameters for that material For example if you select glass then its reflection is 0 9 transparency 0 8 and color transmission 0 6 Material Editor Fabric Wallpa i Global AllMapping f Select Apply Move So you can use this category to directly adjust common materials and then you only need to set the material s color and color texture mapping 329 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Special materials edit Transparent material Its feature if light shoots to the front side of object it will through the object and generate diffuse reflection on the object s backside If you see from the backside the object is alight Value O indicates that the object is nontransparent Value 1 indicates that the object is completely transparent This material us
66. t adjust the number of frames per second but add or delete the total number of frames 9 12 3 Set Path Select Set Path from Animation the 3D view will switch to top view automatically and then you can draw a path by left clicking on the screen The image below shows an example and the ordinal numbers indicate the order of clicking 400 InteriCAD T5 User Manual AMES record le View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Metenal Ting fight Setting Render Anenabor Optenge Heip ae a dee ERS EE ae ET NN g 4 y RQR4 amp 2AR S FOG If Yes that means you are staring at the same position when you are walking along the path If No that means you are looking ahead when you are walking along the path After that another dialog shows as below for more parameters of the path Make Path Cancel 1500 Number of Frames 159 Camera Height Each option is explained as below Camera Height You might treat it height your eyes Ground Detection Assume we input 1500 for Camera Height If it is checked when you are walking on a tread 200mm protruding from the ground Camera 401 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Height becomes 1700 accordingly If unchecked Camera Height keeps 1500 constantly Number of Frames Larger number will lead to smoother result of the animation but bigger size of it and also need more time to render it If no special requirement we recommend the default number After accepting the opti
67. the left button to confirm Mirror the Object Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Object and then Mirror 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 Use the left button to single click one point as the 312 r Edit Move X G Y B Z R Rotate Angle Size X G Y B Z R Construction eS BETO Y Turn Off Tooltip Apply Reset InteriCAD T5 User Manual first point of mirror center line and single click another point again as the other point of mirror center line Copy the Object Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Object and then Copy or from Object menu select Copy Object 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 Use the left button to single click one point as the copy base point and then move the mouse to an appropriate position Left click to finish Delete the Object Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Object and then Delete or from Object menu select Delete Object 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 A dialogue box appears and asks you whether to delete Press Y to finish 9 7 7 Edit Surface Move Surface Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Surface and then Move
68. the model will be automatically absorbed to the surface pointed by the mouse Left click the position where the model will be placed 255 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Replace the library model that already exists in the scene Open library select e button on the tool bar Select the model type in the directory area Double click the needed model preview picture select the model that will be replaced 9 5 2 Hide Library Click Hide Library from Products Library menu or click x on the top right corner of library window 9 5 3 Library Manager 9 5 3 1 Preparation 9 5 3 2 Prepare the Texture Files JPG Note The requirement of JPG seal less color is even and the size is at least 400X400 pixels recommending 800X800 pixels 256 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2000000007 jpg 2000000008 jpg 2000000010 jpg 2000000011 jpg 2000000012 jpg jpg 9 5 3 3 Prepare the 3D Models Please see the example below Users need to prepare 4 files for one model They are respectively mrm jpg mod and _2d jpg files xxx Mrm and the preview picture xxx jpg is a must If you want to layout the models in 2D you have to prepare two other files the xxx mod and xxx_2D jpg And put these files all together in one folder AA le pg 12 mod 12 mem 12 4d jpg T ie 16 1pz 16 mod 16 mrm 16 2d jpg 257 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 5 3 4 Create Catalog Tree in User Library The system library c
69. this command Insert column Basic operations Left click to locate the door Once a door is fixed you can continue insert another door Or right click to 23 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Select Room structure gt Column 2 Input the size of L W H and press OK Dimension Length oo width 400 Height 2800 Cancel 3 Move the mouse to a position you prefer Then left click to finish the command 2 7 4 Edit door and window Select door or window right click The edit menu of door or window will show You can move copy set position set property delete or change orientation Single door Move Copy Position Property inside outside Orient left right Add frame Delete Cancel 2 7 5 Furniture List Function Display the quotation list of furniture Basic operations 1 Select Room structure gt Furniture List And the furniture list will be 26 InteriCAD T5 User Manual shown 2 Here you could export or print the list 2 8 Ceiling 2 8 1 Search Ceiling Frame Function the system automatically searches for an enclosed area around the selected point and take this area as ceiling framework of the generated 3D scene Usually the function is used to build a room s ceiling framework Basic operations 1 Click Search ceiling frame in the Ceiling menu 2 Move the mouse cursor to the workspace and you can see a Pick point inside room prompt According to the prompt cli
70. to build a staircase 5 4 1 Combine Staircases By combining single staircase and flat platform user can construct various staircase styles and set the data to single staircase information The following is an example based on the combination of three single staircases Basic Operations three segments 1 Select Combine Stairs from 3D Model menu and then click Single Stair 2 Input data of the stairs and select the stairs style in the Stair Design dialogue box Stair design Style Stair length Pickups OK Opening ir width 11000 Cancel gt Cosing Stair width Pickups Oblique filling Stair height 11450 Pickups Insert points C Box filling T PLE Step number Detail 153 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select Detail button to change other settings Stair detail design MV Baffle Depth i Thickness 20 Cancel Thickness 20 Wai depth o az V Sideboard q 7 y Slide proofing bar Height 200 Thickness idth so Y icth 20 Offset fo indent depth J Down edge fo Number B Length ratio l Sideline MM Width E y Carpet 7 CET F a The following items can be set in the Stair Detail Design dialogue box e Treadle including the depth and thickness of the treadle o Baffle whether to set the baffle or not and if so the position and dimension of the baffle e Sideboard whether to set the
71. whether the contour line of wall is open up when the door and window is fixed in wall In the following example you can find out the differences of the graph by changing open up into shut down at doors and windows Segment Density it that helps to control the graphic precision is only of avail to arc wall The higher segment density you adjust the higher graphic precision 195 InteriCAD T5 User Manual you will get 6 Hide when the Hide is edited as Yes all the belongings in wall such as doors windows and wall holes will be hidden 8 3 6 Doors amp Windows Attribute Edit Dialog box of Doors amp Windows is shown as follow Attribute Name Unnamed Style Position 1013 9949 0 Width 900 Height 2100 Offset 0 Raise 0 Swing Left Or Right Flip In Or Out Color BYLAYER Hide No Display 3D By using the Edit Attribute you can modify the style of doors amp windows their position in wall their height amp thickness and swing direction etc Style the style of doors amp windows is defined by model of the library You can change the style of doors amp windows into another by simply modifying Style The operational procedure of doors amp windows style edit 1 Choose Style from the Attribute in Edit Attribute and then click Edit 196 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 You can choose another doors amp windows style from the Show Library 3 Back to Edit Attribute and click OK
72. 0 05 23 0 00 0 00 Quotation Close 3 Press the Quotation button and then it produces the same print manager as in 2D Design module 355 InteriCAD T5 User Manual File Edit Tool daa Sto X El Quotation a fezoroo7 oossoo Quaiy 00 4 YFXO17 300 100 Quality 4 You can modify this report list and print it out 9 10 Light Setting InteriCAD VR uses radiosity render theory and ferus all the light sources are based on physical name Unnamed Type EEE optics The integrated function is suitable for ReB f the lighting designer to make lighting analysis x co of the scene o There are totally four kinds of light sources in LightSource Type electricity saving InteriCAD VR general light target spot day Tesetspor 9000 Pr Target Spot V 90 00 light and photometric web among which Ses faso fp general light target spot and photometric web Fanor oso v DirectCalculate Show Selected Only M Switch Off light source is that the light source is real 3D eps Y Global Setting Length Global Setting are solid light sources What is called solid model and after radiosity calculation this 3D 356 InteriCAD T5 User Manual model will shine as the light source in the physical world General Light Diffusion Light Spot Light Emit directional rays and all the rays will concentrate in the circular cone In addition you can use
73. 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 12 SystemLib YFA80012 white 800X800 common F80860P JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 13 SystemLib YFA80013 white 800X800 common F816 JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 14 SystemLib YFA60001 white 600X600 common 180 JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 15 SystemLib YFA60002 white 600X600 common 194 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 16 SystemLib YFA60003 white 600X600 common 195 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 17 SystemLib YFA60004 white 600X600 common 197 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 18 SystemLib YFA60005 white 600X600 common 6Xsp001m jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 19 SystemLib YFA60006 white 600X600 common 6XSP013M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 20 SystemLib YFA60007 white 600X600 common 6XTP001M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 21 SystemLib YFA60008 white 600X600 common 6XTP003M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 22 SystemLib YFA60009 white 600X600 common 8 12XtP003M jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 23 SystemLib YFA60010 white 600X600 common 8XTP003M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 24 SystemLib YFA60011 white 600X600 common F80680P JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 25 SystemLib YFA60012 white 600X600 common F80860P JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 26 SystemLib YFA60013 white 600X600 common F816 JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 27 SystemLib YFA100001 white 1000X1000 common 180 JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 28 SystemLib YFA100002 white 1000X1000 common 194 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 29 SystemLib YFA100003 white 1000X1000 common 195 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 30 SystemLib YFA100004 white 1000X1000 common 197
74. 000000012 SP 2405 SP 24 05 0 00 1000 19 200000001 5P 2408 SP 2408 0 00 1000 20 200000002 SP 2412 SP 2412 0 00 1000 21 2000000021 SP 2414 SP 2414 0 00 1000 22 200000002 X 2010 B F 2010 B 0 00 1000 23 200000002 X 2010 F F 2010 F 0 00 1000 ad y When you select one of the textures you can see the properties of that texture in the information bar or in the working area You can double click the cells to edit the contents Below are rules and formulas of each column of the working area ID It will create automatically and the ID is exclusive and cannot be edited Name It can t be input over 50 bytes The default name is the file name of the JPG file Type SN of the model It can t be input over 50 bytes The default name is the file name of the JPG file Class It is only used for models So please disregard it Brand It can t be input over 50 bytes Manufacturer lt can t be input over 50 bytes Price lt can t be input over 50 bytes Size The height length and width are meaningless for textures They are only 261 InteriCAD T5 User Manual used for models So please disregard them in this section 9 5 3 8 Add Models There are two ways to add models One is Import Models Single the other is Import Models Multi 9 5 3 9 Add Models One by One When you select Import Models Single a window will appear Class Get length 1000 Color 2 width 0o00 Brand Po Height 1000 Price
75. 204 Poly WN acer ess area E iO 17 Ot rete dtc cence aan ees eeaats see naan dette wetowt tna een n easoubacct 17 S200 rs O escorts A eect var conceit onc atl A 17 O21 Ord VIO ned Dimensions 18 352 00 Anoula DIMENS Og gesecntuia ere betesecedus diate E dats 19 R269 Inscrito id oi eee 20 920 10 Inser AAA E N E E tutes E Sisto 21 2 UI A A ON 21 BZ Onl Pree IRC ON IA RA RR 21 2 Ore CACM eo o Mata ce RARA O ra 22 S2 ROOS UCTE ER A 22 O SS O 22 2 ll W ariei ada 23 2 7 3 Insert Door Window and Column occooccnccnnocnnocnnocnnccnnccnnccnnconoconoconoconoconoconoconaccnocnnss 25 E Git SNA A A O 26 2 AU A a e di de deh 26 SO CENS ar E iio 27 Sol Saeimos E aO 21 SA a E a E E S 28 PO Oe nS BIOK aeaa E E N E eetenaeeceeens caceaters 28 ODO C A E O EO E EE EOT 30 PA AA a a ea deeds deanvatyeeda aborts 30 S280 Show Collins Hide Co A E S 31 29 Layout FUM reee A E a cieneneuesetss 31 InteriCAD T5 User Manual SOT E A A a e ade 33 S292 TROIS A A essai Meese stos hearst heed aod ceo senate daseabes 34 A eee eee Cnc mnRapre Dre ToC uen ern EnetTt re mean Te a 35 82 1 Oi Display MOGC i AA ASA NR AAA Ai 35 2 IO Tia Oe QUAY erase nossa PEO r 36 SPU Ss UI icici costs deat lo atv N 36 SPA UE O RE Urey CE ere ree 37 OZ EO De Se tn Ol SNA n aia 39 210 0 mace msc Rot Scuba biz 39 2 10 7 SIZE Dimension and Styles A A A AA A diese 39 2 100 SA AA A EE EEE A eee lenin eb 40 8210 9 Detni Wall TICS iaa aia 40 AA A cu ON ate te eusaeads 40
76. 5 User Manual Products Library Show library Using the InteriCAD VR library interface Hide library Hide the InteriCAD VR library interface Library Manager Add models to library Library Backup Backup restore and merge the library of InteriCAD T5 Import VR block Insert InteriCAD VR block file and the file format is mrm Export Surface User can willfully select some surfaces in the current scene and output these selected surfaces to an InteriCAD VR block file and the file format is mrm Export Object Export objects in the current scene as VR blocks which can be saved in the format of mrm Renew VR Block After you have finished modifying mrm VR blocks overwrite the original one or save as a new file Export Whole Scene Entirely output the current scene to an InteriCAD VR block file and the file format is mrm Create Entity Define a group of surfaces as an object Explode Entity Explode an object so each of its surfaces become an object Clone Object Copy objects from an existed scene Export Clone Object Export vrt file as a clone object scene Furniture List Show all the furniture of the scene Kitchen Design Show Library Show library of kitchen design Close Library Close library of kitchen design InteriCAD T5 User Manual Unit Redrop Move a cabinet unit to a place next to another object Change Size Change the width depth and height of an object based on 3 bases Create
77. 750 Price fo manufacturer Ergo Texture a 9 5 3 10 Add Multiple Models When you select Import Models Multi the file selection dialog box will appear and the number of selected mrm files is not limited 264 InteriCAD T5 User Manual aa E CABIHET ao E 97 CRD 450 2400 OPEN SHELVES Ej 4502T00 mrm 98 lateral 2d Ea BACK mrm 99 lateral 4d EP 2d mem 5 10 mobile pedestal drawer ES lateral ad mem aa mrmi lateral 4d mrm 3 CRD 450x1600 mem LOCKER mem sal SS wees OW PRIMA mem CRD 450 2400 w OFEN SHELVE MEA TO mrm TEF Ck mrm HD Select 00000 unknown 00001 dried flower 00002 cup 00005 vase 00004 decorative book 00005 decorative candlestick 00006 photo frame 00007 dothing 00008 decorative boxe 00009 children s decoration 00016 decoration 10301 square dining table 10a02 rectangulare dinging tz 10303 desk 10304 lt uare end table 10305 end table 10306 entertaiment table 10a07 side thle 10a08 triangle side table 10309 round end table 10310 ound dinging table 10a11 computer desk d 10b01 corner sofa 10b02 other sofa 10503 sinne anfa Cancel After choosing the catalog similar to adding texture you can edit the attributes 265 InteriCAD T5 User Manual of each model in working area by double click I Name Tape Clas
78. AD T5 User Manual 5 5 Visual Library Management Based on Database Management Library management provides common library such as sofa tea table door and windows library and shape library such as wood line handrail All models are displayed in the dialogue box using color pictures for visual selection The entire library is based on database management which provides a user library management system and is convenient for inquiry 5 5 1 Startup Library Management 1 From the Door And Window menu select Library to enter door and windows library management dialogue box 2 From the 3D model menu select Library to enter common library management dialogue box 3 Close the Library Management dialogue box There are two ways e From 3D Model menu click Hide Library command e Left click X button on the upper right corner of the Library Management dialogue box 5 5 2 Library Management 161 InteriCAD T5 User Manual ao T sofa Tisofa als eed Li brary maintain No EE de N E system library Food H E Common 0 2D library EMO 3D library 3 desk 3 cabinet 3 chair EH sofa 0 sofa E combined sofa ie combinatio of sofa Fel vrssevanrranrrenevanrvess C bed T sofa T sofa E kitchen tool E O toilet tool _ lt _ 3 plant gt E indoor y Tisofa T sofa 128 objects Current is D MGXAACADALIBYADDO10 SOFA NJ SOT 3 dwg le
79. Balcony door Window Bay window GridDoor Wall hole Ground v Open Save Cancel 2 Select a template to modify that is stored under IntericadT5 vr mrt Look in de mrt e ex Edy Name Date modified Type Size Le BEDROOM Le europeanstyle de Kitchen a Living room de livingroom jeuropeanstyle00 mrt __ ModernKitchen10 mrt ae Files of type MGXVR template file mrt it _ Carcel Next are the instructions for each item in the template setting dialog box Template file Name You can type your preferred name Class You can either select a type or create your own folder under InteriCAD T5 VR MRT The folder you created will be shown in the drag box 221 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template emplate setting Name Template file General setting Wall Class 301519 8 Single door BEDROOM 11 5 Preview europeanstyle Dual door lachen z Push door Description Living i Collapse door ivingroom Balcony door H Window Bay window GridDoor Wall hole Ground v Open Save Cancel Preview You can either choose a JPG image or put an image under Intericad T5 vr mrt with the same name as the template file In this way you will make a preview for the template Note You can save a rendering image before editing or creating a template Description You can describe the template as you want in text General se
80. Baseline Then select the region of the text on the wall m Define the Radius of Neon Tube 6 Click OK The Neon tube is created 178 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations of creating neon light TypeB Lighting Options Pearl light uses 2D lines as baseline and evenly set bulbs along baseline Latin Perancer 1 Draw a 2D line 2 Select Virtual Reality gt Advance posses oe 3 In Lighting Options dialogue box select Type C which number otreats fso is pearl light Define lighting parameter 4 Click Select Baseline Then select from left to right of the rectangle 5 Define number of pearls 6 Click OK to finish 7 3 Edit Light Basic Operations 1 Select Edit Light from the Virtual Reality menu 2 Select the light to edit 3 Define values in the pop up dialog Note Multiple selections are available However all the values will be the same Meanwhile the light attribute can not be cancelled once it is set Cancel Note Selected object s will become light source Each reflecting the equal amount of light in terms of color and intensity intensity watt Color System HSV y p Hue ooo fi ID saturation 100 B iohtness 179 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 7 4 Export If there is same model in Virtual Reality using this command will replace the model in modeling library with the model in Virtual Reality library Basic Operations 1 Select Virtual Reality gt Export 2
81. Camera Target Point option Then from Camera Height single click Select Path button and then the system will switch to Modeling automatically Under the prompt select camera path select the already drawn polyline as the camera path Input the starting height of the camera path 399 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 6 From larget Point Height single click Pick Point button and then the system will switch to Modeling automatically Left click in the top view of Modeling to determine one point as the target point 7 Input the height of the fixed point Input the total number of frames of the animation 9 Single click the OK button After finishing setting the animation path you should perform animation preview to view the roughly effect Animation preview is very important The effect previewed is completely the same as that of the saved animation If the picture dithers dropped frames in the preview the saved animation file will have the same effect Furthermore the most important is the total number of frames determine the time of the animation For example if the total number is 300 frames and the preview play in 30frame second the time of the animation is 300 30 10seconds If the length of the polyline that is used as the path of the camera is 200 meters the animation will make people feel that it is running like the wind at the speed of 20meters second Note if you feel the moving speed of the camera is too fast or too slow don
82. Contents Chapter d System tro duce ania 1 Sleds SNS A Py SA id 1 E Fy Ste ti eae ste e caste ritual aN E 1 AS A DA Ss AMA A A A A dudes 2 81 22 Introduction to Yuan Pane VR Interface noi 2 S123 Modeline Deston Miter ac soda AS A A a 3 Chapter 2 21 DES ell dad 5 S O A AE 5 O22 COMmMON O PE a 6 O22 sace Ob the MOUSE uta A id 6 352221 WO Operation Rules aiii ricota 6 A A o AAA A A E 6 Sl NEW iia 6 5232 COPE A RANAS AAA AAA Aa 7 SL A e ee 7 S SAO A E a cage sca A E E A aaa eae E AATE 7 o A S 7 O A 8 E O tibet 9 SD O MOL CUL SEU AA A EA AE AAA AA ie 9 Ee oe LA A 9 82 4 OD ect Edit PUNCUON cit E AS EAS AA A de al 9 Saz elec ODE OE saen a ues 9 S22 Und sarasota ca aa co cs et es ee E tdci a Ras eal wae ie aaa 10 DAD TREC Osse8 A saga veaaanastauonh re aeaaaulonchneane as soaueeeipaae E ae ccanoutne 10 SD MV iaa 10 De RON Sates crest sete a coeds Maines le seaaa duanee death aacds Monendnath guehe te obemapennan eden maeatas 11 SL EP A A ido 11 pes o A E ANE E ESEA EA E EEE SEA EE PEETA 12 NN E E TN AEE T OR E 12 SAO VW AT 13 InteriCAD T5 User Manual InteriCAD T5 User Manual e A RO 13 Sao LOOR NAO di te 13 NT 13 SLI PAM AA AR 13 SL ZOOM Mes e tl tal 14 S2530 OI A A A A 14 A Hide Show a csternidatcs catia cunein seal a iaiseiduiattarataaaedune 14 320 Drown TO A A A da 15 eo 15 S202 AT A ete these Evens dn ec eed aca sted eee tel sa E doe ep sted camara ele E cies 15 A ner nn aera E A TRO A eT eT eo en eee ee 16
83. Cornice Create cornice for cabinet units Change Handle Change all doors and drawers of all cabinet units General Panel Generate a simple panel Shelves Panel Generate a shelves panel between two vertical panels Dividing Panel Generate a vertical panel between two horizontal panels Parameter Settings Set the parameter of different elements Select Current Room Select a room for current designing Object Single Selection Select mouse clicked objects only Box Selection Select all objects contained in the selection box Surface repair All the 3D models will be transformed to single face object before and after they enter radiosity This tool can control the orientation of the single face Note this function can only be used before you use radiosity Align Object Align objects Snap On Snap all the vertexes of the small triangles during object edit operation Edit Object Array Array objects InteriCAD T5 User Manual Edit Surface Move delete copy mirror rotate and resize the surface before using radiosity Dettach Separate selected coplane surface or patch Measure Distance Measure distance between two selected points Distance from Object to Wall Measure distance between object and wall Distance between Objects Measure distance between objects Nearest Distance Measure nearest distance on four directions Accurate Edit Select the object surface common surface and triangle and then execut
84. Door ground no Ceiling Information E Wall hole Default r mm m mm s i Wall hole frame Ceiling Type Sunken Ceiling v Wall hole sill E Ground Second Ceiling Shape Rectangle _ Ground stage r Ceiling a Ceiling cornice a Chair rail Skirting E Base board r Lamp la dij j Material TW Open Pick up lt lt save Cancel 4 231 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Ceiling Cornice Default System will automatically generate ceiling cornice according to the default setting Generate System will automatically generate ceiling cornice and you can also define its size and material User Defines You can define your favorite parameters for the ceiling cornice Shape You can define the section shape of the ceiling cornice Distance This controls the distance between the ceiling and the cornice Create template Ceilin j cornice setting Door ground Default Wall hole Generate M User Define Wall hole frame Wall hole sill Height Ground Ground stage Map Length 240 Ceiling Ceiling cornice Thickness t A Chair rail 1 N e Ga Skirting 3 Base board Shape Norme ro Lt Lamp X 4 T gt Distance to Ceiling f Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Chair rail Default System will not generate waistline while activating this option Generate System will automatically generate waistline and you can also define its size and m
85. For example if you select Glass the material will have attributes such as transparent and mirror This option is intelligent and convenient In most cases you only need to select different types if you want to change the material attribute Transmission This is a material attribute If light shoots to the front side Reflection Map Size of an object it will through the object and generate diffuse reflection If you see from the backside the object is alight The most typical example is the material of lampshade Value O indicates that the object is nontransparent Value 1 indicates that the object is completely transparent When doing radiosity calculation this parameter controls how much luminous energy will be reflected by the material To a oure white material value 0 8 means 80 luminous energy will continuously be diffuse reflected You should be experienced to use this parameter Usually this parameter needs no adjustment This parameter can re adjust the value of the auto axis texture map coordinate refer to next section for texture map coordinate 9 8 1 2 Color Label RGB 324 Material Editor Base Color Reflection Transparency Stencil Bump 4 Color Blending 0 10 Brightness 1 00 Texture None f Select Apply Move Tone color using the Red Green and Blue system This color means the diffuse reflection color of the material HSV Color Blending Brightness Tex
86. Library dialogue box is composed of library calling area list area parameter area preview area and symbol size button 5 5 3 How to Use Library Double click the required model symbol in the list area and do the rest operations according to the system prompting 5 5 4 System Manage Mode Selecting sofa and tea table 1 From the 3D model menu select Showlib the Library Management dialogue box popup 162 InteriCAD T5 User Manual ed Li brary maintain 7 o gt EE aA tf E system library E H E Common BB 2D library EXC 3D library 2 E desk J cabinet chair alar e El sofa a Bore combined sofa po ia combinatio of sofa O kitchen tool E toilet tool pe plant indoor System User 128 objects Current is D MAGHACADNLIBYADDOLO SOFANI SOT 1 dwg Double click Home furniture gt Sofa in the list area J sofa J sofa J sofa J sofa Drag the sliding bar in the preview and find the required sofa Double click its symbol Under the Insertion point prompting select the position where the sofa will be placed in the plane view using left button Under Rotate angle prompting input the rotation angle of the sofa positive value for anticlockwise and negative value for clockwise From home furniture double click table and then end table Find the required end table in the list area and double click the symbol InteriCAD T5 User Manual
87. Library menu select Show Library command The following interface appears 254 InteriCAD T5 User Manual eLibrary A e gt E gogx Search Go ig Tool Bar gt WN 110 al M 8 El System Library a Home Furniture n Kitchen Items Directory area Sanitary Ware Es Plant Library Area Household Electricity Appliances ws Noterior Decoration OFM Eurniture Office Chair Office Appliance Reception Desk Meeting Table Executive Desk i computer desk Door and Window Ordinary Door Balcony Door Doorknob Window Structure Exterior Structure Stair Ceiling i Decorative Wall Classic Furniture Lamp Appliance Electric Fitting Home Furniture Collection ba m o E Introduction to the commands on the tool bar from left to right S 110 55H 8 E Attribute System will show you the attribute of the model you selected Sort Order the model in Library area by name Insert Model Enter model status Replace Model Enter model replace status No Collision Check Disable Collision Check function Collision Check In Lnsert Mode automatically detect existing model to prevent overlapping Basic Operations of the Library O Insertthe model F Open library select Y button on the tool bar Select the model type in the directory area Double click the needed model preview picture in the Library area Move the mouse
88. Lines Setting the plinth pelmet and cornice 304 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Parameter Settings e System parameters setting profile o1 New Delete Rename Copy Handle Worktop Lines Others Plinth Height 130 Thickness 116 Front indent 30 Side indent jo Fedestal Style ae Height 1120 Front indent 30 Side indent 0 Pelmet I Install pelmet iW To create pelmet at side edge 5 style Height 22 Width 57 Front overhang lo Side overhang lo Comice W Install comice 4 To create comice at side edge Style a style Height 22 Width 57 Front overhang lo Side overhang 0 Tab Others User can set the default elevation of the wall cabinet Here we have added three new functions One is to set the dynamic orientation The setting allows user to align the cabinet with their front side or back side when putting the cabinets to the scene Second one is to set the filler profile Some of the fillers will have profile on them But if filler is too small it will not have profile So here allow the user to set the width of filler for creating the profile The last one is a tips function For example if user select To design water position after fixing sink the system will remind user to set the water position when he she have lay out a sink into the scene 305 InteriCAD T5 User Manual System parameters setting profile fo New Delete Rename Copy Handle
89. NER e Filler panel When layout the cabinet there are some places where we need to use the filler panel Choose the filler panel from the kitchen library you can 285 286 InteriCAD T5 User Manual define the width of filler panel in order to fit the space e Product Search The system provides the function of finding the product by using the code and the model In the middle place of the Select product dialogue box there is space to display the Code and Model When the user selects different products the code and model will be displayed here User can also press the Find button command after input the code and model of the product If the product meets the code and the model is found the system will find the product automatically and place the cursor onto it Otherwise the message that prompts no such product will appear The accurate query provided by the system now is the combination of Code and Model If either of them is not available not space only the available one will be used as the query condition Code Modelo F40 1L Name Width Depth Height Search Search blurry Cancel e Quick Select of the Product For your convenience to select some frequently used products the system provides the function of quick select of the product When you select Quick Select command button from the Select Product menu a popup menu appears as shown in the figure below This menu lists some frequently used produ
90. Name First Wall Ending Point 3417 6736 0 Wall Height 3000 mm Wall Thickness 120 mm Filling Options Color BYBLOCK Hide No Display 3D At Doors and Windows Open up Edit Attribute Name First Wall ang POE 040 6 100 0 Ending Point 941 7 6736 0 Wall Height 3000 mm Display 3D At Doors and Windows Open up Display There are two kinds of object display 3D and 2D When the object is displayed by 3D mode the 3D graph of the object will be displayed in the screen Reversely it will only display the plan icon when 2D mode is applied Edit amp Copy can be carried out for Display The operational procedure of Display edit 1 2 3 Start the command of Edit Attribute Choose the wall Choose Display from the Attribute in the Edit Attribute Here the attribute value is displayed as 3D and then left click the Edit button Display has already been changed into 2D when Edit Attribute reoccurs Click OK to complete the Display editing of wall Restart the command of Edit Attribute Choose the edited wall Choose Display from the Attribute in the Edit Attribute Now the attribute value is displayed as 2D left click the Copy button 193 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 8 Choose the wall 9 Left click the OK after the Edit Attribute reoccurs 6 Color Color of object can either stand for an index number of one color or a BYLAYER as wel
91. Reflection Transparency stencil Bunp KILA Texture Hone Inver 6 Select to get the correlative black and white picture of plant 333 334 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Note all texture mappings can be used together among the Stencil type is the first to be processed For example a transparency and a stencil texture mapping can be used together and the system will first process stencil texture mapping then process the transparency In addition all texture mappings use the same coordinate please refer to next section for texture map coordinate The integrated effect of plant through stencil and color texture mappings e Bump texture mapping lt can use pattern to simulate concavo convex effect on the object surface Presently the system only support reflective bump texture mapping It needs to meet one of two conditions to make bump texture mapping work Condition 1 the reflection parameter of material must not be 0 Condition 2 the light source with Calculate direct illumination option open can shoot the object surface Basic operations 1 Open the Material Editor Switch to Bump label Click the Texture button of bump texture mapping select the bump pattern file by browsing Set the bump parameter The bigger the value the greater the InteriCAD T5 User Manual bump Reflection Transparency Stencil Bump Emit 4 Texture Emp Emit texture mapping Emit texture mapping
92. Select the wall to be modified and press Enter 3 System will automatically identify the endpoint to be changed based on the selected point which you use when select the wall 4 Specify the new endpoint Note When using this function to edit a wall all other wall will be updated automatically 4 3 2 3 Break This function is used to break a straight wall from any two points and make it into two parts lt is valid only for straight wall If you want to break curve wall then use such functions as trimming and truncating Basic operations 1 Select Wall from Structure menu then Edif Break 2 Select the wall to be broken 3 Select the first point to be broken 4 Select the second point to be broken Shown as the following a straight wall has been broken into two parts from the two specified points 93 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Note When using this function to edit a wall all other walls will be updated automatically 4 3 2 4 Trim Use a line or a wall to trim the wall The range to be trimmed can be specified by line straight wall or curve wall This function is applicable to straight and curve wall Basic operations 1 Select Edit wall from Structure menu then Trim 2 Select the range of line or wall to be trimmed 3 Select one end of wall to be trimmed When selecting the selected point should be near to the end to be trimmed In the following example we use a linear wall to trim anoth
93. VR provides a material library It has two functions 1 It provides lots of common materials and user can directly specify them to models 336 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 User can directly save any material in a scene to the libraries Introduction to material library interface Select Material Library command and an interface appear shown as the following System mat library System lik Wood ii Zelkovall White maple Blek walnut Wood ground01 S Wood ground02 Wood ground03 Wood ground04 Walnut Zelkova02 dark chery wood Wood ground05 Wood ground06 im dark azedarach Glass ZelkovaD1 White maple m Blck walnut Wood ground01 Wood ground02 Wood ground03 vr p No description Advance gt gt Distill Exit Catalog area includes three material libraries system mat library user define mat library and current scene System mat library the system own material library which includes a large number of materials User cannot edit or modify this library User define mat library user can save his own materials to this library and edit them freely Current scene bill of materials in the current scene The preview area can preview the information of texture map in the currently selected material Set material Function after selecting any material from a library use the comma
94. View Products pes Kitchen arru e Material ore Light eins Render Animation e Help di thw ey RE pagan Dl DS al AE PEA AENA alll 1 2 3 Modeling Design Interface e Menu Bar Where software commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button e Tool Bar Where most common commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button e Drawing Window The area you construct drawing The system defaults into four view form The one in the left upper corner is front view in the left lower corner is top view in the right upper corner is side view and in the right lower corner is isometric view e Command Window Where you can input command Status Bar Display cursor coordinate and mode status e Construction Graph Screen Menu Most common Construction Graph commands InteriCAD T5 User Manual Bl ModelndibesionA Drawing EN File Draw Edit Structure Door Window Elevation Ceiling Floor 3DModel Dimension Virtual Reality Window Other oraraa ha O x c A A 39 OP WHo v brLeyer y ByLayer y BYCOLOR POR C 56 fe Isometric View E Mie E de O Qe O D ra a A lalala Layout FILTER loaded 0 0 0 0 0 0 M Layoutl Ready eanamh Bx Soh NAYS Pa InteriCAD T5 User Manual Chapter 2 2D Design 82 1 Interface The interface of 2D design is shown as below o moneter CADIS File Edit View Draw Room Struct
95. WET Command e ommand WCASCADE ommand rompes nil E Comnand 4 3 Polar OSNAP OTRACK M Layoutl 8 1 5 Tile Horizontally This funciton is used for arranging the windows horizontally in the drawing Select Tile Horizontally from the Window menu and window will be shown horizontally 8 1 6 Tile Vertically This funciton is used for arranging the windows vertically in the drawing Select Tile Vertically trom the Window menu and window will be shown vertically 186 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 8 1 7 Arrange Icons This funciton is used for arranging the windows in 3 ways Horizontal Vertical and Cascade 8 2 Others 8 2 1 Yuan Fang Toolbar This toolbar contains several functions such as Attribute Edit New Camera Hide and Regen YuanFang 8 2 2 BtoCAD Menu This function is for switching to standard CAD menu While you are using BtoCAD menu and want to return to T5 menu input mgx in the command line and press Enter 8 2 3 General Setting These are some basic settings for structure elements in modeling These settings will not affect those exsiting drawings 1 Wall e Height This is the default wall height in modeling e Thickness This is the default wall thickness in modeling e Segments per Curve This is default precision for curve objects while exporting to VR such as curve wallhole curve decoration etc e Hatch Style This is the default hat
96. Worktop After a floor cupboard is set select Kitchen Design gt Create Worktop then the system will automatically search for all the floor cupboards and install a Worktop on them The system can automatically generate a full block of Worktop on the continually arranged floor cupboards that have the same depth 9 6 6 Create Worktop Manually 1 Select Kitchen Design gt Create Worktop Manually 293 InteriCAD T5 User Manual r Draw polygon worktop ono gt Zoom Zoom AIl Show Objects Y Show BaseUnit Show WallUnit Y Show TallUnit Offset Cabinet Edge Snap Setting Y Snap Y Ortho Get offset when selecting point Line mode Line Arc Insert Point at the beginning Relative to the origin point x 10 Y 1645 co Bottom Elevation 920 Thick 40 Please select Start point System will automatically pop up Draw Polygon Worktop dialog box Top view of working area is on the left part The right side is the command bar Walls are showed in white lines while cabinets are in yellow User can finish the worktop design by clicking the left mouse in the working area Point snap setting show Objects iw Show BaseUnit Show WallUnit iw Show TallUnit Offset Cabinet Edge Show Base Unit Show base unit in the working area Show Wall Unit Show wall unit in the working area Show Tall Unit Show tall unit in the working area Cabinet Side offset Dr
97. Your required models will be shown and ready to be used 417 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 18 x File View Products Libra Kitchen Design Object Material Light Sett timize Help a y Te Wi My SA E a afe ala bo y o e g go 7 p a mlle lO mala ala aim A A e 01 1000 1000 250 Model downloaded from YFCAD Part3 Recharge Note This service is still under construction Note Any further update about the manual please contact us at support yfcad com 418
98. aa teow ADIOS BOB SL 2K SARS gt eo 2 43 Workplace Plugin h lnteriCADT5 Wvrisystem EnglishKd mrx loaded Plugin hAinteriCADT5 ivrsystem kitchendesign mrx loaded Plugin h interiCADT5 vrsystem catalog mrx loaded Plugin hlnteriCADT5 vrsystem makestd mrx loaded Command Plugin hAlnteriCADT5Wvrsystem Utility dll loaded e Menu Bar left click to use the command e Tool Bar where most common commands are placed you can left click to use the command e Workplace where you can operate the InteriCAD VR scene e Command Window where you can input command directly e Status Bar Display cursor position and mode 203 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic Operations of the Software Common Command InteriCAD VR provides several methods to use the command 1 2 on 4 Left click the command in menu bar Left click the command in tool bar Input command directly in the command window using keyboard Use hot key such as F2 The use of the mouse Left button most operations are completed using left button e g select the command in the dropdown menu click the command in the tool bar select the object and determine the base point of the object Right button 1 During the operation of some commands you need to use right button to operate For example in pitching movement command you can use the right button to control the height of the viewpoint In some commands you can use the right mouse b
99. age path and name for this image in the pop up dialog box 3 Click Save button to save this image 3 Assistant Function Program provides a series of assistant functions to make the ceramic design fast and accurate 83 7 1 Anchor The anchor is used for precise location of ceramic slice The ceramic can use the anchor to determine its location When tiling different ceramics by areas or tiling the waist line in the given position etc it will be very important to set the ceramic anchors by which you can control the division of areas precisely Basic operations 1 Pave gt Anchor 2 The Anchor location dialog box pops up 3 Left click to select a base point Move cursor and program will display the relative location between cursor and base point 4 Left click to add an anchor 5 To add an anchor at specified location input distance along X and Y axis in the Anchor location dialog box 72 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 7 2 Hide All Anchors After finishing the ceramic design you can use this command to hide them because we don t use them when we print out the picture 3 7 3 Show All Anchors This command will show all the anchors that are hidden by the Hide All Anchors command 3 7 4 Tiles Cut Style In ceramic design the ceramic cut is not the only one kind of operation mode You can design flexible tile plans by the ceramic cut The ceramic can be cut to various shapes and by certain combination you can w
100. all Lamp L60mm mf lt lt orimfizas Elia Desk Lamp LIGHT180mm lt lt Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel User defined rule You can define certain rules for the room decoration Here is an example showing you how to set a painting in the wall behind the TV cabinet Select a position to the model mrm you want to set For example select the wall behind a TV cabinet la Cre ate template Bay window GridDoor Wall hole Ground Ceiling Ceiling cornice Chair rail Skirting Base board l Lamp User defined rule Specify furniture no ooo E lt lt Set lo Vertical Keep original scale vw hh Horizontal Keep original size vw o o Add Del Edt Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel 235 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Click button and select a painting model P ee E 41080 ne a de interior decoration d carpet painting 3 paintingl 4 Ly cushion Iron Wall Decor other decoration 1 Ly other decoration 2 dl painting paintingl 7 Name painting16 Manufactory unknown 26 objects Current is 3 Input elevation for the painting ModernKitchenl0 mret Bay window GridDoor H Wall hole E Ground Ceiling mt eed Ceiling conice gsition TV cabinet y On back wall y pS Chair rail Skirting C intenCADT3 VR wrlib lt lt Elevation 0 Base board 3 A pon F Vertical Keep original
101. ally before they are saved If you InteriCAD T5 User Manual have run Radiosity Lights On and get satisfied result please cancel the check box otherwise ticking the check box is recommended Save MRS File When Finish To decide if save the MRS file again after running Batch Render If Radiosity check box is cancel this option will gray out Make Script File To save the renderings After it is clicked a dialog shows as below to save the script The rendering files will saved in a folder xxx_render together with the script file xxx is the file title of the script file Save in i MRS q No items match your search Click Yes to save the renderings Below are saved images of above example 389 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 89 11 15 Channel Picture Output Channel Picture for further modification There are three methods of output by surface by material solid color with texture Basic operations 1 Select Export Channel Picture from Render menu 2 Input file name and save path 3 Set output size and export method Save Channel Map Image Size Usage Ad Output 300dpi sie 3272 x 2362 ie By Surface L By Material Solid Color With Texture cael 4 Click OK to export Results of different export methods are shown as below By Surface 390 InteriCAD T5 User Manual By Material Solid Color With Texture 89 11 16 Hand Drawing
102. and Light source edit dialogue box appears You can see that all the light sources are displayed in red lines and the mouse will become a selection cursor You can use the left button to directly select and adjust light source Now select a general light The selected light source will be displayed in yellow line All the parameters of the selected light source will appear in the light source edit dialogue box First we change its type to target spot light Now you can see the conical projection area of target spot light clearly Change the color of the light source and the color of the cone is changing simultaneously Single click the Pick button and left click on the other side of the floor You can control the projection center of target spot You can also control the projection direction using the sliding bar of target spot light horizontal and target spot light vertical Adjust the emission angle of target spot light to control the dimension of the coning angle From the operations above you can see that it is visual to set target spot InteriCAD T5 User Manual light 9 10 4 Sunlight Setting 1 From Light Setting single click Sunlight Setting Activate Activate Sunlight Effect Note This option must be activated or day light will not perform calculation Sunray horizontal sliding bar is used to adjust the horizontal incident angle of the sunray O degree indicates to sunray from the east which corresponds t
103. and Window from the Dimension menu 2 Select one or more doors and windows that will be dimension 3 Select other axis or walls that will be dimension 4 Determine the position of the dimension 1500 SOO 1500 O0800 1500 gt 6 1 5 Modify Axis Number The modification of dimension mentioned here is not the modification of the number of size but the modification of the axis number After modification the new axis number will be in the circle Basic Operations 1 Select Modify Axis Number from the Dimension menu 2 Select the axis number that will be modified the number or letter in the 171 InteriCAD T5 User Manual circle 3 Input the new axis number 6 1 6 The Area of a Room The area of a room can be calculated automatically The walls should be closed and updated While calculating the area the axis of the wall will be use as the reference Basic Operations 1 Select Room Area from the Dimension menu 2 Select multiple walls The area of the room can only be dimension when these surrounding walls become a closed room 3 The current room to be dimensioned is highlighted e f you select a point inside the room the area of the room will be dimensioned in the position of that point e Input N and the system will turn to next close room e Input E to finish dimension 6 1 7 Dimension Types 1 Dot base Mode Change the dimension type to dot base 2 Cut base Mod
104. and select two points on the drawing to get the length value Width the width of the rectangle area You can directly input the value InteriCAD T5 User Manual You can also click Pick Point button and select two points on the drawing to get the width value Rotation angle the inclination between the rectangle and the X axis forward direction Straight Line Radius the radius of the light Numbers of lamps the number of the lights Fan Shape Sector Internal arrangement when this option is active you can arrange lamps simultaneously both on the sector boundary and inside the area Otherwise you can only arrange lamps on the boundary Odd even When this option is active you can arrange lamps in odd even mode in the radius direction of the sector Otherwise the lamps will be arranged orderly Radius the radius of the lamps Numbers of lamps on A the number of lamps on the arc direction of the sector Numbers of lamps on B the number of lamps on the radius direction of the sector Inner radius the radius of the sector s inner circle Outer radius the radius of the sector s outer circle From angle the inclination between the start radius of the sector and 139 140 InteriCAD T5 User Manual the X axis forward direction Angle the degree of the central angle of the sector Circle Internal arrangement when this option is active you can arrange lamps both on the circumference and inside the area
105. and we will give examples later Transparency Label InteriCAD T5 User Manual Material Editor Base Color Reflection Transparency Stencil Bump 4 d Transparency 0 00 te Refraction i 00 0 5 gt 3 Texture None Inverse f Select Apply Move Transparency The feature that you can see objects behind glass is called transparency Use texture map to control transparency You can make some special effects with it and in the following we will illustrate that Refraction Transparent objects for example magnifier can produce ray refraction Some thicker glass may produce unreal color Refraction settings include red green and blue Usually default value is 1 Also we can make some special effects by using stencil bump emit and wave labels In the following we will respectively illustrate them Basic operations for material processing Basic operations are shown in the following 1 Choose the existing material on the model then change its color and apply to other models Y e Click 99 Material Editor appears o Here the default Select button is activated and the mouse turns to a sucker shape Left click to distill the material used by the model at the mouse position e Switch to Color label in the Material Editor then move the color slider and you can see the changing color of objects Note 1 Only pure color materials can be changed color while texture 321 InteriCAD T5 User Manual
106. anged to the corner Under this condition the view must be switched to the one that can see the location of the corner such as the top view When arrange the auto installed worktop and the 291 InteriCAD T5 User Manual waterproofing panel it will be arrange along the wall 2 The pillar is bigger than the cupboard shown in the right side of the figure below the pillar is arranged along the wall and the pillar can be seen as a common wall 9 6 2 Close Library Click Kitchen Design gt Close Library user can close the kitchen library 9 6 3 Unit Redrop Command Kitchen Design gt Unit Redrop Use Unit Redrop to move a cabinet unit to a place next to another object e g a wall or another unit Use your mouse to locate the unit you want to move There will be a green shadow the place is suitable for that unit 9 6 4 Change Size Free Change the width depth and height of an object based on 3 bases Basic operations 1 Select Kitchen Design gt Change Size 2 Choose object you want to modify 3 The system will pop up Change Size dialog box 292 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Change Size p Width W 400 Base Leftside No Move v Depth D 580 Base Backside No Move Height H 720 Base Bottomside No Move Cancel 4 Change Size by modifying the values in the dialog box choose bases to change size from different direction 5 Click OK the end the setup 9 6 5 Create
107. annot be edited Users can only edit the user library For example Ergo shown in the picture below is the user library Double click Mdbmanage exe to open mdbmanage and the photo below is the interface of mdbmanage Database management Default By Sort By Name Class A system_library information bar 3 Carpet 3 Ceramic Brand 9 Concealed_wardrobe pae Electric_appliance OO a ice Manufacturer Fabric an Manufacturer Price Length joor_marble Furnishing 3 Home_furniture 3 Kitchen Lighting 3 Marble 53 Mosaic 3 Office_equipment 3 Office_furniture 3 Other 3 Paint 0 20 M A Q N Parton working area 3 Wallpaper Wood bed 4 door_and window 9 office furniture texture catalog tree 9 5 3 5 Adda Directory To add subdirectory to the root or a directory you can right click on it and then select New Group A pop up dialog will show and then input the name for the new driectory in the dialog box then click OK A new subdirectory is inserted 258 InteriCAD T5 User Manual New Model_Group uten Em ERGO Hew Group Sort Rename 9 5 3 6 Move a Directory There are two ways to move a subdirectory to another directory The first one is to drag and drop The second one is to use the Move to function in right click menu If there are already textures or models in the directory the director
108. arrangement design of the kitchen cabinets and accessories such as base unit wall unit sink unit and cooking range 283 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Step 1 2 284 Click Kitchen Design gt Show Library The product dialogue box appears shown in the right picture You can change the width depth height and its locating method of the unit that will be arranged as requirements Then click the Layout gt button or double click the product to start Layout After you click the Layout button move the mouse into the 3D room or we can call it Drawing area The system has intelligent location function It will snap the cabinet to a proper location When you find the cursor turn into an arrow it means this location is proper Now you can left click to locate the Solid Wood GradeA Defaultiliide Q Select A BaseUnt Library directory AS Drawer BaseUnt RightOpen Open meas 380x720 F40 1L 600x580x720 F50 1L 4 m p wW 400 D 580 H 720 Model size D11500 D2 0 D310 Locating method of the product ojo ss fo Shape Dimension input Elev On toekick v Elev to floor 12 Layout gt item When the cabinet is interfering with doors or windows the system will popup an error prompt e Intelligent Location Function When locating the cabinet the system will automatically find the proper location for the cabinet according to the size the cabinet the position of door and
109. aterial User Defines You can define your favorite parameters for the chair rail Shape You can define the section shape of the chair rail 232 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template l Default Door ground Wall hole Y Generate User Define Wall hole frame Wall hole sill Height 100 Ground Ground stage Map Length 240 Ceiling ickness 10 Ceiling cornice Thickness Ce A ata Skirting W Base board Lamp 4 7 Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Skirting Default System will not generate skirting while activating this option Generate skirting System will automatically generate skirting and you can also define its size and material X Skirting setting A AI N gt Create template Si Wall hole sill Default S Ground Y Generate Ground stage Ceiling Height 960 Ceiling cornice Chair rail Map Length 200 Thickness 10 Base board Lamp Vertical Tile Num 4 User defined rule Specify furniture Material 5 4 mA Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Base Board Default System will not generate base board while activating this option Generate System will automatically generate skirting and you can also define its size and material 233 InteriCAD T5 User Manual User Defines You can define your favorite parameters for the base board Material You can define ma
110. ause the fluorescent lamp s ratio of electrical energy to luminous energy is higher than that of the incandescent lamp The system has integrated the light intensity standard of electric lighting handbook Generally you should select the type of light source according to the actual situation E g common lamp should be incandescent lamp Daylight lamp should be straight fluorescent lamp Target Spot H Control the horizontal lighting direction of day light and target spot Target Spot V Control the vertical lighting direction of day light and target spot Beam Spread The coning angle lighted by target spot Falloff Target spot uses direct lighting option and will have clear light source boundary This option cans smoother the light source boundary Calculate Direct Lighting This option is only valid for target spot If you activate this option target spot light will have clear shadow and lighting boundary after raytrace 359 InteriCAD T5 User Manual calculation Show Selected Only If this option is selected only the name and power of currently selected light source will be displayed Switch Off This light source will not be calculated in radiosity calculation Eps Set the eps of this light source in radiosity calculation Length Set the minimum length of this light source in radiosity calculation The following illustrates the setting of target spot 1 360 From the Light menu select Light property
111. aw offset line to extend or cut worktop edge Operations are as follows a Click Offset of cabinet side and then the cursor will become a small white pane 294 b d 1 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select the broken line as the base line Cancel Distance 100 V Intersect with Wall Then system will pop up Offset dialog box and there is a green arrow on the chosen line Input the offset value in the box while using minus value to offset in opposite direction Intersect with wall is to control the connection between offset line and wall Click Ok then the generated offset line will be showed in blue Point setting Show Objects if Show BaseUnit Show WallUnit iw Show TallUnit Offset Cabinet Edge Snap Control the point snap function which will be showed in green pane Orthomode Control ortho function when draw a line 295 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Point offset After defined all the points system will pop up Point offset dialog box The chosen point will be set as 0 0 2 Line Mode Line To draw a line Line mode f Line f Are a i gt a Insert Point atthe beginning 3 Arc To draw an arc Line mode f Line Arc f Center Point Second Point f Clockwise C AntiColocwise Insert Point atthe beginning There are two ways to draw an arc a Select the first point and then the central point to define the radius of the arc Draw an arc clockwise or anticlockwise Clock
112. back to the previous step 4 More material about the model is required such as preview jpg minimal size 800x600 Front view Side view Top view and 3D 411 InteriCAD T5 User Manual perspective view are required texture jpg or bmp or tif Other material provided e g dwg max dxf will speed up the process Click Add to add relevant material or just drag amp drop to the dialog box Click Remove to delete those you don t want to add Attachment You can drag and drop to add files here C Users yfcad Desktop Sphere jpg Add Remove 5 Click Next to continue or click Back to go back to the previous step 6 Select the type of the model Price will be lower if you tick Share my model Write down your requirements about the model under Decoration box such as texture other details etc 412 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Detail Information Model Type Modern Classic Decoration Y Share my model Decoration 1 This is a standard geometric model 2 Pure white 7 Click Next to continue or click Back to go back to the previous step 8 Alist of detailed model information will be shown in the dialog Model Information Service number 001 20100813143757209 Date 20100813144737 Name Sphere Brand YFCAD Manufacture YFCAD China Remark Share Model Decoration 1 This is a standard geometric model 2 Pure white Model Attachment A
113. base point The slices will be automatically cut by the region border Wall Plan Basic operations 1 2 3 4 Pave gt Tiles Plan Choose Wall Plan Choose an item from the catalogue and then double click on target plan Left click on target region If you click in the left half area system will 67 InteriCAD T5 User Manual layout tiles from left to right vice versa 3 6 2 Tiles Plan Management 3 6 2 1 Manage Tile Plan Group Program already provides many tiles plans If user needs to create his own tiles plan library it is suggested to separate it from system bier sans library Program provides the function of group maintenance Right click on existing group to display the shortcut menu whose commands can act on the selected group Delete group New group Basic operations 1 Choose New group in shortcut menu 2 Input a name for the new group 3 Click OK button to create a new group under current one Modify group name Basic operations 1 Right click on target group 2 Choose Modify group name in shortcut menu 3 Input new name in the input box 4 Click OK button to change the group name Delete group Basic operations Choose Delete group in shortcut menu Click Yes button to confirm the delete operation 3 6 2 2 New Plan 68 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create new plan to save tiles design Floor plan Basic operations 1 Select Floor Plan 2 Choose a group to add
114. box and their operations is basically the same 346 Material map path C Mgx Map glass i Clear Map gt e In addition to make the operation more convenience This menu is generated by clicking the right button to provide Restore to original material and Clear map function Note Restore to original material function can only return the dialogue box to its original Status If after adjustment you close the Intelligent Match color then the system cannot return to the most original material information when you open it again 4 Save match color plan e First specify the ceiling ground and wall Only at that time can the Add to lib button be activated e Click the Add to lib button and input relevant information in the popup box and click Ok to save it All information can be searched through the Search function Note you may not select Room style If you directly input some information into the field then it will create a new directory Ce1ling GroundWall Group Define x Group Aa Group Des Room Style Po Lib Maintain Cancel eo After inputting these parameters click Ok Close the entire Intelligent Match color When you open it again you will find the new added plan 5 Maintenance to match color plan The match color library is based on database so its management edit 347 348 InteriCAD T5 User Manual and backup function are very easily to use Edit or delete existing plan
115. c by pieces and by area The Count by pieces method is to sum all the ceramic slices in the drawing The ceramic slice that has been cut is also considered as a whole one The Count by area method is to calculate all the tiling areas for a certain type of ceramic slice first and then divide the area of one slice and then work out the total usage according to the conversion coefficient wastage Basic operations 75 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Select the required ceramic type in the list Then the Modify Data field at the bottom of the dialogue box is enabled 2 Select a method in the Modify Data area 3 If you have selected the Count by area option then you should input the Wastage data 4 Input the unit price which is the price per piece without considering different methods 5 Press the Refresh button 6 System will recalculate the quantity of used ceramic slices by the new wastage Print the usage report A ter finishing the ceramic usage statistic you can print the usage report Press the Quotation button and then it produces the following print manager E Workdesk Product search Usage statistics Area All regions v Refresh report Print report Waste Ratio Quantity Price SystemLib YFE40002 400x400 0 05 1 0 00 0 00 Edit data Product information Statistical method 2 Waste coefficient Unit price Input user information in the report make proper
116. c operations Select UCS gt UCS Off in the View menu 9 4 10 Camera Edit Camera From the view menu select Camera gt Edit Camera Camera Location X 983 9 Y 4073 9 7 1450 Target Point X 981 Y Z 11450 Focus Distance 22 0 Close Changing the coordinate of the camera location can control the position of the camera Changing the coordinate of the target point can control the position of the camera target point Changing the focal length of the lens can control the focal length display of the camera When moving in the scene and getting an ideal perspective angle you can save the current camera Left click Edit Camera button 2 on tool bar a dialogue of camera editing will appear shown as picture on the right 232 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Deepth J Cam Height ZENO Focus 220 TarHeight 14500 Save Cam Cam List Edit Close Preview Drag camera and target spot to change view Depth Drag a slider to adjust the depth of view Cam Height Set camera height and change vertical direction of view only effective in camera view Tar Height Set target height and change vertical direction of view only effective in camera view Focus Change the focal length of camera Save Cam Save current camera setting Cam List Show saved camera settings Save Camera From the view menu select Camera gt Save Camera command Press OK button after you enter the name of the camera Name of Camera
117. can control the hidden and showing the floor 3D drawing floor plane icon and floor color filling status The commands are Show the 3D floor Hide the 3D floor Show the 2D floor and Hide the 2D floor lf you want to control the display of the object please activate this view and then use the corresponding command 147 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Chapter 5 3D Modeling InteriCAD T5 provides 2D and 3D library which enables user to design easily In addition the system delivers powerful modeling capabilities that can be used to construct wood line stair 3D Text and 3D object 5 1 Modeling Function Based on Library 5 1 1 Handrail Handrail Library This function can generate the whole handrail on the curve route according to the given shape in the library Also it can be used to make handrail of the stairs Basic Operations 1 Select Showlib from menu 3D Model 2 Select a handrail or unit shape from the Library Maintain dialogue box 148 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Bo FEA tl a HandRail pillar E balustrade E balustrade Ejbalustrade E bannister oo J pillar de porch and sunshac e stair Fate A y E bannister 5 objects Current is 3 Input the parameters and press OK 4 Pick a polyline in the workspace to locate the handrail 5 1 2 Fence You can build a fence on baseline according to the fence unit in the library Basic Operations 1 Select Showlib from menu 3D Mod
118. ch is the alignment point of the cell s base point 4 9 3 Curve Step Generate the step according to the path of polyline Basic operations 145 1 2 146 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select Curved Step from the Floor menu Select the step style in the Steps dialogue box and input the definition data Press OK Style Slanting Riser Board A Y Width 250 Height Setps 5 _ Add Slip Resistant Floor Thickness 0 Pick Floor No Slip Nosing Added Explanation of the parameters Style Totally 7 styles of tread You can also customize a style e Thread The width of each step Riser The height of each step Number of Steps The number of steps e Add Slip Resistant Slip Resistant will be added automatically if this option is active Floor Thickness The altitude of the step underside Pick Floor You can determine the floor thickness by picking on the screen InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 Select a plane curve and the steps will be constructed using this curve as the base line 4 9 4 Move on Elevation This function is similar to Move function It is used for moving object vertically While moving the object please make sure you are using WCS Select the object you want to move and then define the base point and second on the evlevation view 4 9 5 Display Control of the Floor Objects The system provides four commands to control the display of the floor objects They
119. ch style for the wall in modeling Changing the default will affect the new walls 2 Color Setting 187 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Wall Layer This controls the display color of the wall e Grid Layer This controls the display color of the grid e Window Layer This controls the display color of the window e Column Layer This controls the display color of the column 3 Dynamic Orientation 188 e Distance This controls the distance while moving doors or windows along the straight wall e Angle This controls the distance while moving doors or windows along the curve wall Initial Setup Wall Height Thickness Segments per Curve 36 Hatch Style No Filling sd Y 3 D F Disable 3 D Color Setting Wall Layer BY BLOCK Grid Layer Window Layer Column Layer BYBLOCK Dynamic Orientation Distance 100 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 8 2 4 Display of Objects System provides functions to control the display of the objects lf you want to hide show the object please activate the relavant command and select the objects 8 3 Summary of Edit Attribute Edit attribute is one of most outstanding features of CAD modeling Attributes are geometric parameters for modeling and data for defining the graph of object Each attribute can define or affect one aspect of certain object and at the same time every attribute is comparatively independent Edit attribute is applicable to all the objects If you
120. cial views such as plane view and right view Zoom Mode Zoom window The five special views mention above can use this command to zoom in and zoom out the window and make partial view Zoom Mode Zoom extend The five special views mention above can use this command to display the whole scene Zoom Mode Zoom rotate Rotate the view and every time the command is executed a 30 degrees angle will be rotated UCS Set UCS Left click any surface in the scene and the current space coordinate will be built based on this surface using the green axis as the X axis and the red axis as the Z axis UCS User Coordinate System UCS Rotate X Axis Rotate the UCS around X axis green axis UCS Rotate Y Axis Rotate the UCS around Y axis blue axis UCS Move UCS Rotate the UCS on the XY plane UCS UCS On Display the current space coordinate system and a blue grid will be generated on the XY plane UCS UCS Off Hide the current space coordinate system Camera Edit Camera Edit the position of the camera the position of the target point and the focal length of the camera lens Camera Save Camera Save the current view to the camera list Camera First Camera Switch to the first camera view in the camera list Camera Last Camera Use the last camera in the camera list and return to perspective status ShowCamera list Display all the saved camera lists Double click to switch the camera 207 InteriCAD T
121. ck the left button inside the room where the ceiling framework will be generated to determine the position of the ceiling framework and then the Ceiling setting dialogue box appears Ceiling setting Ceiling shape Do not use ceiling type _ Cancel Use existing ceiling type Elevation 2800 3 In the dialogue box you can set the elevation of the ceiling framework default elevation is 2800mm Press OK then the system generates the ceiling framework in the room s closed area that has been previously 27 InteriCAD T5 User Manual searched and displays it in a red line framework in the draw area 2 8 2 Manual Ceiling Function generate individual ceiling with any shape at any place Basic operations 1 Click Manual ceiling in the Ceiling menu 2 Move the mouse cursor to the workspace and you can see a prompt asking you to determine the ceiling framework s First point Click the left button to determine it Then move the mouse to another position a Next point prompt appears and here also dynamically displays the displacement between the two points Repeat the process to determine all nodes of the ceiling framework Note it needs at least three points to determine the ceiling framework Click the right button to finish selecting the area and a Ceiling setting dialogue box popup 3 Inthe dialogue box set the elevation of the ceiling framework default elevation is 2800mm Press OK then the system
122. click one point as the first point of mirror center line and single click another point again as the other point of mirror center line Copy Surface 314 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Surface and then Copy 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 Use the left button to single click one point as the copy base point and then move the mouse to an appropriate position Left click to finish Delete Surface Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Surface and then Delete 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 A dialogue box appears and asks you whether to delete Press Y to finish 9 7 8 Detach Detach Coplane Surface e From the Object menu select Detach and then Coplane Surface e Click the coplane surface that will be detached using the left button Press Enter to confirm after selection Detach Patch e From the Object menu select Detach and then Patch e Click the patch that will be detached using the left button Hold Shift to add more Press Enter to confirm 9 7 9 Measure Distance Select Measure Distance from Object e Left click to select the first point move cursor to another point and left click 315 316 InteriCAD T5 User Manual The command window will show the distance between these two
123. ct frame containing area click OK to finish Whole image scope Insert an image frame fitting the size of the whole image automatically Define scope Click to select first point move mouse and click another point to define the second point of image range 2 6 11 Insert File Function attach or cover the entire drawing koc format on the current one After exploding them you can edit any part in the current view Basic operations 1 Click Insert file in the Draw menu 2 Select an image block file to be inserted koc format 2 6 12 Free Region Function create the floor in a customized area Basic operations 1 Click Free Region in the Draw menu 2 Left click in the workspace to as the start point You can see the lines while you continue to click and define points You can draw triangle rectangle or any shapes 21 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 When you get the shape you want right click to finish drawing The shape you just drew will be filled with white color which means the floor is created in this area 2 6 13 Search Region Function automatically search a room or closed shape rectangle circle etc to create floor inside the area Basic operations 1 Click search region in the Draw menu 2 Move the mouse in the workspace then left click inside the room or shape you want to create floors The room or shape need to be closed so the system can recognize and search 3 The room or shape sele
124. cted shelf board 17 Shelf board When locating select the shelf board which are on the right side of the object Then input the number of height InteriCAD T5 User Manual 18 Special position on wall when locating product select one piece of wall In the pop up dialogue box input the reference point and distance from the product to the wall Then click Finish Then this product will be located on wall L3 2020 La 0 i By Center 19 Special position on floor when locating product select one piece of wall In the popup dialogue box input the reference point distance to wall and elevation Then click Finish The product will be put on the location f o Floor Fix l h _ ls Li 3400 L lo Elevation 1000 L3 lo FT OnWall 7 By Center hm Setto topview next time automatically For every product in the library there is one defaulted locating method When locating certain product you can change its locating method e How to Deal when the Cupboard Unit Encounters with the Pillar When the deployed cupboard unit encounters with the pillar of the room the system will automatically snap the cupboard to the suitable place according to the size and location of the pillar There are two conditions 1 The pillar is smaller than the cupboard shown at the left side of the figure below the cupboard can be arranged near one side of the pillar and the pillar can be seen as a common wall besides the cupboard can be arr
125. cted will be cover with white color which means the floor is created inside 2 7 Room Structure 2 7 1 Design Wizard Function Use Build Room function to create a room in rectangle or L shape Basic operations 1 Select Room structure gt Room Or click on the tool bar 2 Define the size of room 22 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Name New room v m Shape r Dimension Inner wall distance Central wall distance a fono s f5o c foo oo mei 3 Move the mouse to the design area Left click to locate the room Press Space bar to rotate the room Press N to switch the wall corner Note In the Create room window you can simply change the name shape and the size of the room you are building By changing the dimension of each wall you can change the inner or outer length of each wall By ticking the check box of Generate room floor you can simply create the floor when locating the room in workspace 2 7 2 Wall Function Build the wall and it will automatically fit to other walls Basic operations 1 Select Room structure gt Wall or left click Free Wall command in Design Wizard panel Za InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Base dialogue box will pop up Move the mouse and left click for the starting point of wall Wall parameter Draw wall Cancel Thickness 120 Locate to C Left side e Central line Right side Triangle Wall 3 Modify the parameter of wall
126. cts When you select one product for example the Nacelle the system will automatically find out the nacelle product and InteriCAD T5 User Manual move the cursor onto it automatically to make known this product is selected Self define shortcut gt gt Select the last item of the popup menu Self define shortcut the Custom Shortcut dialogue box appears You can customize the quick select items After using Add Modify Delete Move Up and Move Down commands Ok button must be pressed so that the customized shortcuts will be valid Add Add one customized shortcut After select Add command button the User defines dialogue box appears Input the name of the shortcut behind the Shortcut Name 287 288 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Custom Shortcut Mame Dir Dir2 Dir3 Dird Select specific product category from the First Level Catalogue Second Level Catalogue and Third Level Catalogue separately Press OK and one customized shortcut is added Modify Modify the selected shortcut The operation is similar to that of Add Delete Delete the selected shortcut Move up and Move down Arrange the shortcuts according to the user s requirement After select one shortcut select the Move Up and Move Down command button to complete the new arrangement e Modify the Size of Product The products within the system product library have the fixed width depth and height You can also modify size of selected unit
127. d Shift to select backrest on the other side The software will automatically use one container to highlight the two selected objects as shown below You can easily select the whole sofa by this way Note if there is other objects that you do not 320 InteriCAD T5 User Manual wish to select in window selection switch back to Single Selection from Object menu hold Shift and left click to deselect them one by one 9 7 14 Clear Selection Select Clear Selection from Object All the existing selection will be cleared 9 7 15 Object Display You can hide the object under InteriCAD VR or use black wireframe to display The hidden object still functions during radiosity calculation The hidden object will not be displayed during raytrace calculation Basic Operations Single click on the object display button 1 A dialogue box appears Left click on the object that will be processed 2 There are two modes to hide or show objects One po is Select Object and the other is Select Surface MMM Select Object 3 While using Box command the selected object will i f Select Surface be shown in wireframe Hold Shift key to do multi select iden selection Press SHIFT to Multi Select Right Click To Apply 4 Press Hide button and select the object or surface you want to hide Hold Shift key to do multi selection The object that is hidden or displayed in wireframe can be displayed in normal
128. d dynamically show the range covered by slices by using the square boxes with the same size to the slice 9 Left click in an appropriate position and then the new ceramic slices will be added to the region The new slices will be automatically cut according to the region border and the existed ones in the region Also you can press the F key to tile the whole region lt may get different results due to 64 InteriCAD T5 User Manual different ceramic cut styles set in the system 3 4 5 11 Details Basic operations 1 Right click on the target tile and then choose Details in shortcut menu 2 The Ceramic Slice Detail dialog box displays Product info Product Systemlib Code YE seiption CeramicTle SSS type FZ SOS S S S size ADN AO Color dark red Grade Quality Unit 0 00 H InteriCADT 5 ck2d image common 3 18 Show large image 3 5 Border Line Program provides function to generate border line automatically There are two types of border line styles 65 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Style 1 Style 2 Basic operations Pave gt Border Line Left click on target region when the cursor is replaced by a small red box Left click a point to specify the start position of board line Choose a style in the pop up dialog box Click Select button to choose a tile in the database Click OK button to create border line 3 6 Tiles Plan Ooarhrwonn 3 6 1 Select a Plan To make the ceramic design succeed once
129. d single face is Each face l t Check Connected Faces only deals with the face of one orientation and scan at Viewpoint we call the face of this orientation as Front face When we face the front face we can see it If we walk to the back of this face the system will not deal with the orientation of that face and we cannot see it any more When the system load a model it will automatically deal with the orientation of the single face but sometimes the orientations of very few faces are not right This makes the model seems to be transparent or lack of some faces When this happens you need to use surface orientation to adjust Single click It provides three tools Options 1 Reverse connected face Directly single click the reverse face using left 307 InteriCAD T5 User Manual button The system will forcedly adjust the orientation of this surface and all the connected surfaces to the camera This option is especially suitable for wood line and screen 2 Check connected face The function and operation is basically same as the option above But the option above may cause some problems when the model has connection errors one surface is adjusted properly but another surface that has right orientation is adjusted to wrong When this happens you can use this option to solve the problem 3 Scan at viewpoint Scan the whole scene automatically using the current position as the center so that the orientation of e
130. d so on When locating the product you can also input the Elevation height 5 Onworktop by unit the bottom elevation of the product is the same as the height of the selected worktop When locating select the unit that you want to put the product on then the product will be put onto its worktop E g cup and so on 6 In worktop by unit the upper surface of the product will be above the selected worktop When locating select the unit that you want to put the product This locating method is suitable for items which are in the worktop For example sink gas cooker and so on 7 Under worktop by unit the upper surface of the product equals the lower space of the Worktop of the selected unit When locating you need to select the unit in which the object will be installed The product will be located under the worktop of the selected cupboard 8 Over selected object when locating product you need to select one object The product will be deployed above this object automatically For example the cupboards above the half height cupboard 9 Under Selected Object when locating product you need to select one object The product will be deployed under this object automatically 289 290 InteriCAD T5 User Manual For example the decoration cupboard under the wall unit 10 At Special Height when locating product you need to select the position point The distance between the ground and the bottom of the product equals the specified
131. d visual So we recommend that you don t need to do material operation under modeling interface since all the corresponding operations can be done under InteriCAD VR This chapter introduces how to process materials under InteriCAD VR A Introduce the basic composition elements of material such as color texture 322 InteriCAD T5 User Manual map etc B Basic operations of material such as build new material assign material edit color and texture map etc C The making of common materials and special materials D Intelligent Match color Basic Feature Parameters of Material All the natural matters have some basic attributes For example the green plate glass has three attributes First it is green second it has mirror reflection and third it is transparent And smooth marble has two attributes marble pattern and mirror reflection 9 8 1 Material Editor Material Editor makes several labels according to the attributes of object Y Single click and the material editor appears Shown as below Material Editor Transmit 10 00 H Map Size 500 500 W Global Update AutoMapping AllMapping f Select Apply Move 9 8 1 1 Basic Label Name the name of the current material You can enter a name e g floor It enables you to conveniently manage the material Type Classify different types of materials according to their 323 InteriCAD T5 User Manual different attributes in the physical world
132. dels to the 2 Add models All models including furniture decoration stairs doors windows and etc 168 From the 3D Model menu select Showlib the library management dialogue box popup Click User Library to open a directory Single click the preview area on the right side using right button and select add library The Add Library dialogue box popup Single click the file type which DWG file belongs using left button and InteriCAD T5 User Manual press OK The Input Data dialogue box popup Set Object name Specification Height and File The Height value should be accurate and File is to define the path where the DWG file will be saved The system prompts Select objects Click the DWG model that will be put into library and then click right button to confirm The system prompts Insertion point Single click the center of the model using left button and press OK Operation completes Chapter 6 Dimension InteriCAD T5 provides comprehensive dimension regarding the size of the axis wall door and windows 6 1 Dimension The system provides various dimension methods dimension on linear axis dimension on arc center wall windows dimension and door windows dimension 6 1 1 Dimension on Linear Axis Basic operations 1 Select Linear Axis from the Dimension menu 2 Select an axis that will be dimensioned 3 Ifthe dimension direction is gradient you should first determine the start of the axis number 4 D
133. diosity Single click 9795S Through 9penino ony 5 Raodisity button In the popup dialogue DOX pinseracor oso the system provides three calculation methods Cancel 370 InteriCAD T5 User Manual to control the times of radiosity In addition it also provides two calculation precisions to control the quality of the image 9 11 1 1 Three Calculation Method 1 Continue until stop button is pressed as the radiosity calculation is repeatedly the more the number of calculation times is the better the effect is To stop the calculation of this method press stop button 2 Stop running after times This option can control the number of times that the calculation will be performed and then the radiosity calculation will be terminated automatically 3 Stop running after minutes This option can control the time that the calculation will be performed and after that the radiosity calculation will be terminated automatically These three options can be used according to your personal custom You can still go on calculating using the exist calculation result after the radiosity calculation terminates so it is recommended that you calculate first using customized number of calculation times If the effect is good you can single click radiosity button again to continue calculating 9 11 1 2 Three Calculation Precisions 1 Normal Precision The process to the surface is relatively reasonable The eff
134. direct lighting option to calculate clear shadow and light source illumination boundary You can get real effect only after you make raytrace calculation Sunlight Parallel light and all the rays are emitted parallel You can get real effect only after you make raytrace calculation IES Light source in IES format 9 10 1 New Light From the Light Setting menu select New Light The mouse will become a blue cross Use the left button to single click the corresponding surface Right click to end operation Please note that the operation of set light source can only set the surface as general light or remove the light source property of the surface The settings of target spot entrance or day light entrance need to be completed in the operation of editing light source 9 10 2 Clear Light Property Clear Light Property could cancel the light property of surface From Light Setting menu select New Light The mouse will become a blue cross Use the left button to single click the corresponding surface 9 10 3 Edit Light Select Edit Light from the Light Setting menu or single click y The light 357 InteriCAD T5 User Manual source edit dialogue box will appear Now the mouse will become a selective frame and all the light sources on the screen will be displayed in red lines Left click the corresponding light source and the selected light source will be displayed in yellow line lf there is more than one type of light sources
135. door frame A ao Create template low frame setting iw an A T Push door a Defaut By parameter Collapse door Parameter i Balcony doot Width 90 Thickness 10 E Window Window frame Material Windowsil Section Win Cover x js Curtain Bay window La PE Fit May GridDoor E fe Wall hole Model File e lt lt Ground l Inner Width 1000 lt Inner Hei ht 1800 lt Ceiling ES a ES Sl TT gt Thickness 10 Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Window sill Built in depth This value controls the depth that extends to the wall Material You can define material for the window sill 22 InteriCAD T5 User Manual ON Create template Windowsill setting Push door Default Collapse door eN Balcony door Built in Depth 25 Window Material Window frame ena El Windowsill Curtain Bay window 111 GridDoor Wall hole Ground 7 Ceiling gt 4 mn p Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Curtain Default System will automatically generate curtain with the default model Note System will not generate curtain in the kitchen and bathroom User defines System will automatically generate a piece of sheet in front of the window You can define its material and size Side space Decide the distance between side edges of the curtain and the wall Distance to wall Decide the dista
136. e Change the dimension type to cut base Note Dot and Cut modes are used to modify the display mode of the dimension node The mode will be modified after you use the command but the dimensions that already exist will remain unchanged 6 1 8 Common Dimension Types 172 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Horizontal Dimension Specifies how far extension points are offset from origin points horizontally 2 Vertical Dimension Specifies how far extension points are offset from origin points vertically 3 Align Dinmension You can create dimensions that are parallel to the locations or objects that you specify In aligned dimensions the dimension line is parallel to the extension line origins 4 Diameter Dimension lt measures the diameter of an arc or circle and displays the dimension text with the diameter symbol in front of it And it displays the dimension text with the diameter symbol in front of it 5 Radius Dimension lt measures the radius of an arc or circle and displays the dimension text with the letter R in front of it 6 Angular Dimension lt measures the angle between two lines or three points To measure the angle between two radiuses of a circle you select the circle and specify the angle endpoints 173 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Chapter 7 Virtual Reality Commands in Modeling In this chapter we will introduce some functions in virtual reality 7 1 Set Light Basic Operations 1 Select Set Lig
137. e generated ceiling board can make Boolean operation with other solids object If the second ceiling board is rounded the dividing accuracy of the circle can be controlled The process is same to the dropped ceiling Normal Layered Ceiling Ceiling board levels can be used to make multi level ceiling board and can also be used to make the lamp slot Select the first level contour lines or the previous level ceiling board base surface Basic operations 1 Select Ceiling gt Normal Layered Ceiling from the Ceiling menu 2 Assign the dimensions and form of the ceiling board in the Normal Layered Ceiling dialogue box and press OK 130 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Normal Uaverca Selling Distance A 3000 Distance B 200 Board Thickness 30 Light Cove o BalkHead Depth C Height D Moldings Moldings 1 Moldings 2 Cancle 3 Select the plane outline of the second level ceiling board After the command has been executed a two level ceiling board has been made If you want to make a three level ceiling board you can make the structure of the first and second level And then call the Normal Layered Ceiling command again select the second level base board and the third level contour lines The process is the same other multi level ceiling Cut Away on the Ceiling Board A hole of any shape can be cut on the ceiling board The polyline which is used to define the shape of the entrance hole should be a clo
138. e Brand Manufacturer Price Length 1 7670015 PRIMA PRIMA 10d15 Ergo 0 00 383 71000016 CRD 450 2400 v CEO 450 2 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 3599 3 7000017 CRD 450x1600 CRD 450x1 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 1600 4 7000018 CRD 4502700 CRD 456027 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 27100 TOO0019 CREDENZA BACK CREDENZA E 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 1800 6 7000020 lateral ed lateral 2c 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 600 T 7000021 lateral 3d lateral 3c 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 Bog TOOO0z2 lateral dd lateral de 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 B99 4 7000023 LOCKER LOCKER 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 420 10 7000024 mobile pedest mobile pec 10d15 Ergo Ergo 0 00 399 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2l 22 2d 24 25 26 2T 28 24 an Below are rules and formulas of each column of the working area ID It will create automatically and the ID is exclusive it won t be repeated Name It can t be input over 50 bytes Type SN of the model lt can t be input over 50 bytes Class The class of the model When double click the cells of this column the catalog selection dialog box will appear and user can choose the type from the dialog box Note Models of different catalogs will have different layout methods Brand It can t be input over 50 bytes Manufacturer lt can t be input over 50 bytes Price lt can t be input over 50 bytes Size lt can be divided into 3 parts height length and width user can select these one by one according to the model D
139. e Ey crease o oe N 276 BS D1 C OMe OD A 276 89 5513 Expote Clone OD Eat A ee eae 279 A A A OA 279 SKO 6 116 UN Deso aeneae E COD POE TI eae eres A ANAO 283 SO SNOW LID V erioa iia E T E NTE ONEA 283 8962 Close LADA iii a aaa 292 S20 UM ROOD eoii eE AA see 292 89 6 EE B E ZO Aa 292 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 37 05 Create WOOD tabs 293 S900 Greate Worktop Manual Vc us Ib A E 293 SOO Create Panta 298 SOLO Create Pele aaa dia a a aaa 299 6 9 Create COMIC ra teles 299 SIA AA O 300 TRAE General Parla 300 S902 Shelves PANS ina A iii 301 sO Dvd me Pane A aegis tuahimatunaeas ane mnaees tamer 302 89 6 14 Parameter S CUINA A A A seis AA NS 302 SOLO Set CUE RO ol otcolcada 306 o RR 307 Sl Single elec dolce 307 A ORS 1S 0 OA 307 E A A O A O 307 OO FA AOD EC tai her ace sade ieee en dui lac casa T O eee eves ee ealads 308 ie ies ames A ge weer ene meer nate res Mere yerert gee tere Moree y geet rer eee rcze gece es wre etre 309 99 0 EdE ODI dt A AAA 309 Suda EdEo ca 313 So Dacia aaa 315 SAO Measure DISTANCE ra tte 315 89 7 0 Distance trom Object to Wall seisne 316 09 71 Distance Detween OD ecc od 316 S9 2 Nedrest DIS AAC idas 316 SN NA O 316 SL O RN A O A 321 A A verses stacks aeaeere E AN 321 SOTO Hide Unselect data SA AAA a i eai 322 BO hell IOC ODOC O A Pe O o E A 322 OD Tol Se E 322 A SON A E eset re Se ero ne ete ee ree Rees eee 322 SS Matera uranio id emcees 322 SUS Materna Edit Ada di 323 S982 Material LID
140. e File menu select Slope Ceiling System will turn to top view automatically Slope ceiling parameter Set the proportion between the height and the hemline of the slope ceiling The default parameter of the hemline is 10 For example if you set the value of Slope ceiling parameter as 5 and the length of the hemline is 1000 then the ratio is 5 10 and the height of the slope ceiling is 500 Model Ceiling methodi parameter C method2 ceiling height slope ceiling parameter ceiling height Ceiling height The height of the ceiling This option ES elevation will be invalid when using method 1 2800 Elevation The elevation of the ceiling slope ceiling plain ceiling Slope ceiling Set the ceiling as slope ceiling Plain ceiling Set the ceiling as plain ceiling ceiling O slope ceiling 1 slope Ceiling list Display the ceilings in existence You can right click the ceiling listed and select delete to delete Sailing List the ceiling Snap Turn on off the snap Add ceiling When all the settings are finished click hdd ceiling Add ceiling to draw a ceiling edit select ceiling Edit selected ceiling Edit the parameter of an existed ceiling Select an existed ceiling in the Ceiling list and 238 InteriCAD T5 User Manual modify the parameter of it then click Edit select ceiling to confirm the modification Patch base line Change the base line of the ceiling Select an existed ceiling
141. e color for the door ground either selecting from the library or picking up from the scene Create template jle doc r ground setting Wall decoration M Default Single door Door frame Material Dual door Door frame m Door ground Push door E Collapse door j Balcony door Window Bay window X 4 TA gt Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel The rest types of doors share the similar setting with the single door Window Default System will automatically generate windows with the default mrm model Frame Decide whether to generate window frame Sill Decide whether to generate window sill Curtain Decide whether to generate curtains for the window Sash width Decide the length of single window model For example if the sash width is 1000 and you have created a 3000mm window in 2d system will automatically divide it into 3 parts 3 single windows Window model You can define a VR model mrm for the window 226 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template Window setting rmm nm Push door a 2efau Collapse door e T Sil Curtain Balcony door Window A Sash Width 1000 j Window frame Windowsill Window Model dw238 mm lt lt Curtain Bay window GridDoor Wall hole Ground Ceiling X 4 m Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Window frame Please refer to settings of single
142. e corresponding edit operations Clear Selection Clear the existing selection Object display The model in the view will be displayed in a black wireframe or be hidden directly Hide Unselected Hide all unselected objects Hide Object Hide selected object Hide Surface Hide selected surface Show All Show all objects Material MaterialEditor Build new material assign material to a model and adjust the material All the material parameters can be adjusted before using radiosity And most parameters can be 210 InteriCAD T5 User Manual adjusted after using radiosity Material library Execute operations such as save the material and assign the material Fit map Fit the texture map size same as surface size Editmap Adjust the existing texture map coordinate such as move rotate scale and mirror Resetmap Set the texture mapping type as default Random material Adjust the entire scene or the individual object You can apply the match color plan from the library and add new one Tiling Quotation Quotation of tiles such as price number and wastage Light Setting New Light Specify one object in the scene as a light source You can control the parameters such as light source type brightness and light color Clear Light Property Cancel the object as light source Edit Light Adjust the light source parameters of the scene such as light source type brightness and light color
143. e dialogue of changing the direction of in out right left will appear again in the command window 4 6 4 3 Edit the Cover of the Doors and Windows The styles and data of the frame can be modified using frame editing command Basic operations 1 Select Edit Cover from Door Window menu 2 Select the cover that will be modified and modify the data and style in the Door Win Cover dialogue box Press ok after you finish 4 6 4 4 Copy the Cover These function of copying the generated frame to other doors and windows Basic operations 110 1 2 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select Copy Cover from the Door Window menu Select the cover that will be copied Select the door and windows on which the cover will be generated 4 6 5 Edit the Doors and Windows You can use the attributes to edit the basic data of a door and windows For more information please refer to Attributes editing The editing tools introduced here do not involve the modeling data of the door and windows 4 6 5 1 Copy the Doors and Windows This function is more powerful than ACAD It provides the dynamic locating method and can automatically update the wall where a door and window is placed Basic operations 1 2 Select Copy from the Door Window menu Select the door and windows that will be copied Select a wall where the copied door and windows will be placed Determine the position of the door or window on the wall Pleas
144. e instruction click the object The selected object will display a node with highlighted yellow color 3 After selecting right click to finish the current operation 4 Follow the instruction to define the rotation center and then move the mouse At the same time it shows the relative displacement and rotation angle dynamically After rotating to the proper position click the left button to determine the target position 2 4 6 Copy The command can copy one or more objects in one time which is usually used to adjust a set of furniture Basic operations 1 Select Copy in the Edit menu or click button in the tool bar 2 According to the instruction click the object to be copied and the selected object will display a node with highlighted yellow color 3 After selecting right click to finish the current operation 11 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 Follow the instruction to define the start point for copying and at the same time it shows the displacement of the copied object relative to the source object 5 After copying to the proper position click the left button to determine the position of the copied object 2 4 7 Mirror The command can mirror one or more objects in one time which is usually used to adjust a set of furniture Basic operations 1 Select Mirror in the Edit menu 2 According to the instruction left click the object to be mirrored and the selected object will display a node with h
145. e profile lf you want to modify the parameters of the generated model through this function such as baseline shape profile shape segment accuracy and rotation angle you can use the Attribute Editing 5 3 3D Text The construction of 3D Text can be divided into two steps The first step is to array the 2D text on a line or a curve The second step is to transform these 151 InteriCAD T5 User Manual array 2D texts into 3D texts 5 3 1 Text Along Path You can array the 2D text along any curve This is the preparation for making 3D text and the position of the text can be determined Basic Operations 1 Select 3D Text from 3D Model menu and then Text 2 Select the font size array rule in the 3 Dimension Text dialogue box Input the text that will be displayed in the graph and select OK 3 If you select Align On Straight Line you should select two points to define the straight line if you select Align On Curve Line the text will be arrayed along the chosen polyline The result of the text array along the curve is shown as below 5 3 2 Transform 2D Text to 3D Text Basic Operations 1 From 3D Model menu select 3D Text and then Extrude 2 Select the 2D text to be transformed 3 Input the thickness 4 The system will ask whether to delete the baseline 152 InteriCAD T5 User Manual The 3D text transform from the 2D text as shown below 5 4 Staircase The system provides various methods
146. e refer to Door and Window Locate for locating method The copied door and windows will be placed on the default position of the wall The system will ask you about the direction of the door or windows Repeat the operations of 3 5 if you want to continue copying the door and 111 InteriCAD T5 User Manual windows into other walls Otherwise press the right button or Enter to finish 4 6 5 2 Move the Doors and Windows The system provides more accurate function to move door and windows This function is more superior to the tool of ACAD It provides the dynamic locating method and can automatically update the wall where a door and windows is placed The system provides two commands to move the door and windows Single Movement and Multiple Movement Multiple Movement tool can move multiple doors and windows at the same time on the same wall Basic operations 1 Select Multiple Movement or Single Movement from the Door Window menu 2 Locate the door and windows When using dynamic locating the dimension line of the door and windows will be displayed 3 Move the mouse to the proper position and press the left button to determine the final position of the door and windows location 4 6 5 3 Display Control of the Door and Windows Under the ventilation mode the hidden display of the door and windows need to be controlled The system provides the door and windows display control tool and you can Startup them by selectin
147. e selected object will be shown Note every object has its unique edit menu This menu cannot be found in the tool bar 82 3 File Menu 2 3 1 New File Create a new drawing file Basic operations Click File gt New in menu bar Note If any changes have been made to the current file the system will ask you whether to save it Click Yes the system will save the file If it is a new file the file will be saved as a new file Click No the system will open a new file without saving the current file If Cancel the system will not open a new file 6 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 3 2 Open Open a previously saved file which is in koc file format Basic operations Click File gt Open in menu bar Select the file 2 3 3 Save Save the current drawing file which is in koc file format Basic operations Click File gt Save in menu bar lf the current file has been saved successfully a File saved dialogue box will appear lf the current file is to be saved for the first time it will display the Save dialogue box In dialogue box choose the file path and input the name of the file then click Save button 2 3 4 Save as Save the current drawing as a new file in a different name 2 3 5 Export Image Export any selected area in the workspace to a bitmap drawing which is in jpg file format Basic operations 1 Click File gt Export image in menu bar 2 Click the left top corner and right bottom corner
148. e system and trim the window accordingly to the specified direction Set up user coordinate system with two methods first select a straight wall and set the UCS to the wall second select two points to define the elevation 114 InteriCAD T5 User Manual location and set the UCS to the elevation After setting up the UCS trim the elevation window according to the view direction Basic operations 1 From Elevation menu select Set UCS 2 Select the method to set the user coordinate system e If input P then use a straight wall to set the user coordinate system and the system will ask you to select a wall e f select one point directly on the screen then use two points to set an elevation A shirr from the first point to the cross cursor appears on the screen and the system will ask you to select the second point 3 Select the side to which you stand and decided the observation direction How to decide the view direction it should be vertical to the set elevation and its vector direction is from the standing side to the elevation 4 Select a window as the elevation view After setup in the elevation view only those graphs at the same side with the elevation relative to the observation position will be displayed and the others will be hidden The graphs in additional windows remain unchanged lf you want to return to the world coordinate system after finishing the elevation processing then select Return WCS from Ele
149. e to get optimized outcome Help Help document of InteriCAD Copyright information Some Common Used Commands Integrated on the Tool Bar Load From Modeling Stop Raytrace Reset Radiosity Light Adjustment Color Mode Move Spin pan Edit Camera ie p de A n aT Merge From Modeling Radiosity Raytrace Partical Raytrace Texture Mode Wireframe Mode Elevate Face to Light Property Object Display Select Mode Object Surface Patch Mapping Clear Selection 3 gt i pih y 7 Material Edit Surface Orientaion Copy Map Matrix Coplane Surface Preview Record Save Image 214 InteriCAD T5 User Manual right Da extend last o SS D zoom J Default keyboard shortcut command F2 Show Library F3 Raytrace F4 Auto Light Adjustment F5 Delete Object F6 Material Editor F7 Edit Light F8 Last Camera 9 3 File Menu 9 3 1 Open Open a previously saved file which is in mrs file format Basic operations Click File gt Open in menu bar Select the file 9 3 2 Save Save the current drawing file which is in mrs file format Basic operations Click File gt Save in menu bar A Save as dialogue box will appear In dialogue box choose the file path and input the name of the file then click Save button 215 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 3 3 New Create a new drawing file Basic operations Click File gt New in menu bar Note if any changes have been made to the current file the system will ask you
150. e willfully Note you d better walk in wireframe mode and the control of mouse is relatively easy 3 After you finish walking single click Record button again to finish recording 9 12 2 Select Path Basic Operation of Setting a Polyline as the Path of the Camera 1 Switch to Modeling and draw a line using Polyline command 397 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Switch back to the InteriCAD VR interface From Animation menu select Select Path command 3 The default option Set Path For Camera in the pop up dialogue box is ok Single click the Select path button and then the system will switch to Modeling automatically Path Selections Options f Set Path For Camera Path For Target f Set Path For Camera Target Point if Ground Detection oa Camera Height 1500 Select Path gt Target Height 15000 Selecta Target Point Height 1500 Pick Point Number of Frames 30000 4 Under the prompt of Select camera path select the polyline that has been drawn just now 5 The height of polyline drawn directly in the plane drawing should be 0 But the height of the camera path should not be 0 It is recommended that the starting height of the camera should be around 1500 to simulate the height of a people s eyes So the default setting is ok 6 Input the total number of frames of the animation 7 Single click the OK button Basic Operations of Setting the Path of Camera and Target Path 1 Switch to Modeling a
151. ead the wall structure of the selected plane file and preview using yellow lines Click the left button in the room that needs to generate 3D scene and the room will be displayed in yellow dotted line Press Ok 219 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select a Room to Generate Single click in the room you want to generate and then the selected room will be highlighted Room Type TESTS Select All Rooms D The system will automatically generate the 3D scene of this room in InteriCAD VR 9 3 10 Template Setting InteriCAD provides an advanced function for you to create your own templates Template is the style or atmosphere of the room you want to generate in 3D Most of the elements in the template are basic features of interior design such as door and window styles floor maps skirting cornice etc You can modify or create your own template using Template Editor The template format is mrt which is put under path X interiCADT5 vr mrt X is the disk where you have installed InteriCAD T5 Basic operations to modify an existing template 1 Open 3D select Template Setting from File menu or input mt in the command line Next click Open button in the pop up dialog box 220 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template e Lo j See Name Template file General setting l Wall Class BEDROOM vw Single door 3 Dual door a Preview El Push door cy Collapse door
152. ect will be good after twice or three times of calculation and correspondingly the calculation time need is less Meanwhile it uses less system resource especially the memory usage 2 High Precision The subdivision level of the surface is much higher than normal precision The shadow effect of light and transition effect of halo are rich 371 InteriCAD T5 User Manual than normal precision Correspondingly the required number of calculation times is higher than the normal precision In addition it requires more system resource as the number of surfaces that will be calculated is higher 3 User Define Before using user defined precision you should understand how the system performs radiosity When enter virtual roaming the surface is divided according to division length parameter in InteriCAD VR If the default precision is 800 all the surfaces will be divided to the patch whose length of the right angle side is 800 Radiosity will subdivide the patch surface whose length of the right angle side is 800 The patch that is far away from the light will not be subdivides for example The precision parameter here that controls the surface subdivision is epsilon When the value of the light energy received by a patch surface exceeds this parameter the patch surface will be continuously divided The smaller the area of the patch surface is the less the light energy it can receive The division continues until the value of the light energy i
153. ectangle Ss C Polygon By Height Height E ix amp E x fo yt EN x2 jo y2f0 zz ES Split 2 Select the surface you want to split according to the prompt 3 There are three types to split By Region There are two options to create region One is to select Rectangle and other is to select Polygon Pick the point to define an area right click to finish Next press Splitto separate the surface By Height Input a value in the box beside or press the button accordingly to define a height in the scene Next press Split to separate the surface By Line You can either input the exact coordinates of two points or click the two buttons accordingly to define a line to separate the surface Next press Split to separate the surface 354 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 9 6 Extrude Surface Extrude a surface in Render module Basic operations 1 Select Extrude Surface from Tiling 2 Select a surface needed to be extruded right click to confirm 3 Input the distance to extrude in the command window press Enter to confirm 9 9 7 Quotation Basic operations 1 Select the Quotation command from the Tiling menu 2 It pops up the Tiles Quotation dialog box tiles Quotation _Manufacturer Number Wastage Usage Price Total _oldlib_ B201_ 007 0 05 29 0 00 0 00 _oldlib_ B201_005 0 05 29 0 00 0 00 SystemLib YFx018 0 05 13 0 00 0 00 SystemLib YFx017 0 05 8 0 00 0 00 SystemLib YFXO21
154. ed some light arrangement scheme from our analysis of lots of users work According to the area and the structure the system selects scheme automatically to create preview picture for your choice Basic operations 1 From Light Setting menu select Smart Light 2 Four preview pictures with different light arrangement scheme and rendering effect appear in the popup dialogue box select one 3 Click Setting set up the value Light Mode choose to determine day or light effect Note The window and door in the scene must be set as light Radiosity Times the calculating time for radiosity Output Dimension the dimension of the output 368 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 10 7 Smart Light Setting When using Smart Light command all existing light sources will be turned off by default setting Select Smart Light Setting command from Light Setting menu and then use cursor to select certain light sources left click to keep it being turned on Basic operations 1 Left click to select target light source multiple selection is enabled 2 Left click on selected light source again to remove it from current selection 3 Right click to confirm the selection and the command will be finished 4 To change the setting run Smart Light Setting command again 9 10 8 Special Light 1 Select Special Light 1 from Light Setting According to the prompt select the position of the lamp and then orientation points You can select at m
155. efore placing tiles 3 4 5 1 Move Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Move in shortcut menu 33 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Ceramic region Move Rotate Copy Continuously straight tiling Interval straight tiling Odd even tiling Continuously oblique tiling Interval oblique tiling Offset tiling Free tiling Details Hide border Delete 2 Move the cursor in the region to get a suitable position When moving cursor close to regional boundary or existing tiles current tile will snap to them automatically Press Spacebar to rotate the tile 15 degrees anti clockwise each time 3 Left click to place tile It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style 3 4 5 2 Rotate Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Rotate in shortcut menu 2 System will creates a dynamic line between the geometry center of the whole ceramic shape and the moving cursor and the ceramic will rotate by the angle generated by that line Left click to place the tile in a suitable angle It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style 3 4 5 3 Copy Basic operations 56 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Right click on target ti
156. el 149 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Select a style from the Library Maintain dialogue box It s under the structure menu in the library 3 Input the definition data of the fence unit 4 Select a curve polyline as the fence baseline 5 1 3 Wood Line Build a wood line defined by a plane curve as the baseline and profile pattern library selected as the profile The dimensions of the wood line profile can be determined by the Molding dialogue box Molding axe Unit X 28 1706 Pick Unit Y 60 0535 Pick Profile Segment 0 on Path Segment Rotation Angle 16 2 D Symbol Outward Cancel l 150 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic Operations 1 Select Showlib from menu 3D Model 2 Select a wood line from the Library Maintain dialogue box It s under the structure menu in the library 3 Input the dimension data of the profile in the Molding dialogue box and then Press OK 4 Select a plane curve polyline as the baseline to generate the wood line 5 2 Modeling Along the Path This function is used to build models by extruding a profile close or unclose along a plane path You can select multiple profiles and the shape of the profile can be customized or selected from the library Basic Operations 1 Select Extrude by Path from the 3D Model menu 2 Select the model baseline 3 Select the profile shape of the model 4 Select the base point of th
157. ension Basic operations 1 Click Aligned dimension in the Draw menu 2 Move the mouse cursor to the workspace Click one point as the first point Then move the mouse to another position A prompt will be displayed to ask 18 InteriCAD T5 User Manual you to determine the second point and dynamically shows the distance between the two points Click at a proper position to determine the second point 3 As the starting and ending points have been defined you can click an empty space nearby the line Now you can see the dimension is created and aligned with the line or wall you measured 2 6 8 Angular Dimension Function to get the distance between two lines The system automatically measures the angle Basic operations 1 Click Angular Dimension in the Draw menu 2 Move the mouse cursor to the workspace and you can see a prompt asking you to determine the vertex Click at a proper position to determine it and then move the mouse to another position A prompt will be displayed to ask you to determine the first side and here also dynamically shows the distance and angle variation between the two points Click at a proper position to determine the first side of the inclination repeat the above to determine the second line 3 At that time move the mouse to an appropriate position and click the left button to determine the arc s location for angle dimension 19 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 6 9 Insert Image Functi
158. er Manual 9 4 View 9 4 1 Display Mode The model in the perspective workplace can be displayed in three modes Left click Texture Mode button and then all the texture maps and pure color materials will be displayed This is the system default setting But the display speed may be slow if the amount of models is large Left click Color Mode button and then all the texture maps will be displayed as pure color material You can view the match color status of the scene Left click Wireframe Mode button and then all the models will be displayed using wireframe and the speed is fast 9 4 2 View Click the Top View button The system will automatically switch to top view and the height of the viewpoint will maintain the same with the perspective viewpoint You can press the left button to drag upward and downward to change the height of the viewpoint of the top view Click the Bottom View button The system will automatically switch to bottom view and the height of the viewpoint will maintain the same with the perspective viewpoint You can press the left button to drag upward and downward to change the height of the viewpoint of the bottom view Click the Front View button The system will automatically switch to front view and the position of the viewpoint will maintain the same with the perspective view If the position of the perspective viewpoint is behind the scene there will be no object in the front view
159. er Manual Color all product colors can be found in the drop down list Note By choosing Not specify that means do not specify product color Class all product classes can be found in the drop down list Note By choosing Not specify that means do not specify product class Note composite conditions are available for querying The more conditions that is specified the fewer tiles can be searched out And it might even lead to empty search result Click Search button after specifying condition Search result will be listed in display area 3 4 3 Place Tiles in the Region By dragging Basic operations 1 Choose a tile from search result 2 Left click on the tile and then drag it to target region 3 Move cursor to blank area and release left button 4 Move the cursor in the region to get a suitable position When moving cursor close to regional boundary or existing tiles current tile will snap to them automatically Press Spacebar to rotate the tile 15 degrees anti clockwise each time 5 Left click to place the tile in suitable position and angle It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style By double clicking Basic operations 1 Choose a tile from search result 2 Double click it and then select target region 3 Move the cursor in the region to get a suitable position When moving c
160. er all the options have been determined single click OK button The final result completes after the system automatically finishes calculation 9 11 13 Additional Scan lf using Photon Map Raytrace method to save an image with the name XXX jpg A file named XXX jpg buf will be created in the same directory The XXX jpg buf file contains information of the finished image Additional Scan command could use this information to render a better image base on the original one Basic operations 386 Select Additional Scan command from Render menu a dialogue box will pops UP Additional Scan Initial Image Additional Scan Times Click z button to choose target image make sure that the buf file is in the same directory and the camera view should be the same as the target image Input a value in the input box of Additional Scan Times click OK button Specify the name and path of new image please do not replace the original file InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 11 14 Batch Render In InteriCAD T5 users can output a batch of renderings with Batch render function All cameras of the renderings should be saved with View gt gt Save a tame ATAN A EI SOUSA RRAARS rea View Lit ll Cameras of the renderings are to be saved ommand showCameraList Command 387 388 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Then Select Batch Render from Render and then a dialog shows as below Batch Render Render Method Opt
161. er linear wall and an arc wall Note When using this function to edit the selected wall all other wall will be updated automatically 94 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 3 2 5 Cut This is an expansion of the trim function On performing this function and after a wall is selected the system will automatically search for the cutting boundaries according to the selected point and automatically process the wall intersection after cutting Line straight and curve wall can be looked as a cutting boundary Basic operations 1 Select Edit wall from Structure then Cut 2 Select a wall The system will automatically cut the wall according to the selected point Note When using this function to edit the selected wall all other walls will be updated automatically 4 3 2 6 Extend This function enables a straight or curve wall to extend to the selected boundary After you select a wall the system will decide which end the selected point is close to and the corresponding end will be extended The extended boundary may be a line straight or curve wall Basic operations 1 Select Edit wall from Structure menu then Extend 2 Select the extended boundary 3 Select the walls to be extended 95 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Note When using this function to edit the selected walls all other walls will be updated automatically 4 3 2 7 Fillet This function can be used to fillet linear walls intersected or non i
162. eriCAD T5 User Manual Need optimization to eliminate interference and light leak interference and light leak Bump effect and Gloss effect need to Bump effect and Gloss effect don t resort to direct light function and are need to resort to direct light function lack of realness and are of strong realness Need to set up parameters for Antialias Do not need to set up parameters for The higher the value is the longer it Antialias takes to calculate Use one time calculation method Use cumulative method of quality of rendering is determined by calculation the longer the the result of Radiosity calculation time is the better the rendering quality is Rendering quality in detail is lack of Rendering quality in detail is of realness strong realness UF A e Single click Raytrace button gt or use Partial raytrace switch to Photon Map Raytrace label to get more precise result Raytrace Max Depth Scan Times e Input the number of times of calculation before stop program will start Raytrace for the scene and stop automatically according to the setting If click Infinite Raytrace process must be stopped by hand Click OK to start calculation 9 11 3 Stop 378 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Stop calculation when performing raytrace or radiosity Basic operations Select Stop from Render 9 11 4 Instant Render On Off To get satisfying light effects in Render User would frequently start radi
163. ern 6 Pick a point in elevation view to define the bottom of the wood ceiling structure 4 8 1 3 Coffered Ceiling The grid ceiling board also has several forms Linear Grid Triangle and Honeycomb 133 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations 1 Select Coffered Ceiling from the Ceiling menu 2 Select the style of the ceiling board in the Lattice dialogue box input corresponding dimensions Press OK Style C Linear 9 Grid Triangle O Honey Unit length 250 Unit width 250 Layout angle 0 Section height 50 Co Section thickness ui In the dialogue box Layout angle is the inclination between the assigning direction and X axis forward direction The default value is zero and the direction is consistent with the X axis forward direction Cancel 3 Select the boundary that may include several closed areas mm mm mm mm 4 Select a point to determine the projection area of the ceiling board 5 Assign a point to define the pattern 134 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 6 Pick a point in elevation view to define the bottom of the wood ceiling structure 4 8 1 4 Trim Ceiling The function is used for trimming the coffered ceiling Basic operations Method A 1 Select Trim Ceiling from Ceiling menu 2 Select the first corner and then the second In this way the coffered ceiling will be trimmed by a rectangle shape Method B 1 Draw any shape u
164. essary to show the 3D drawing in the isometric view and no need to show the boundary The system provides four commands for controlling the display of objects finishing there are Show Hide 3d view and Show Hide 2d view These commands can be found in the 3d View and 2d View options from Elevation menu lf you want to control the show of object finishing in some view you should first make the view active and then use the corresponding command 4 8 Ceiling Board 4 8 1 Build the Ceiling Board The type of the ceiling board is various and the model is complex YuanFang Interior Design System provides four kinds of ceiling boards Plastering Metal strip Wood strip and Lattice 4 8 1 1 Ceiling The system provides four tools for the plastering ceiling board Make single surface Dropped ceiling Cut away and Air vent grille Base Surface of the ceiling board Make single layer plastering ceiling board And you can cut it away or open an 129 InteriCAD T5 User Manual air ventilation grille on it Basic operations 1 Select Ceiling from the Ceiling menu and then Ceiling 2 Select the boundary which may include several closed areas 3 Select a point to determine the projection area of the ceiling board 4 Input the distance of the ceiling board bottom from the ground 5 Input the thickness of the ceiling board Solid Layered Ceiling Solid ceiling board levels can be used to make multi level ceiling board and th
165. etermine the form of the axis number There are two forms 1 2 or a b Dr 169 4500 4500 i 4500 13500 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 6 1 2 Dimension on Arc Axis Basic Operations 1 Select Arc Axis from the Dimension menu 2 Select a axis that will be the dimension 3 If the selected axis is an arc the base axis selected will be used to determine the dimension direction 4 Ifthe selected axis is a line then select the axis that need not to dimension Select the position of the dimension 6 Determine the form of the axis number There are two forms 1 2 or a b a 200020002000 3 ped O OGG a 6 1 3 Walls with Windows Dimension Introduction Dimensioning a single straight wall or the curve wall with door and windows on them It is only valid for the wall with door and windows Basic operations 1 Select Wall Dimension from the Dimension menu 2 Select the wall that will be dimensioned 3 Determine the position of the dimension 170 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 6 1 4 Door and Windows Dimension Introduction Dimensioning the multiple doors and windows of the same direction on the straight wall If the selected doors and windows are of different directions the system will automatically select the direction that most doors and windows have to dimension Those doors and windows that are on the different directions will be ignored Basic Operations 1 Select Door
166. everse Path Direction 6 Define the number of column in the selection of Stars along paths define the number of bulbs in each column in the selection of Start between Paths 7 Click OK and the lighting will be created TAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVINAVIVIVIV UEC TEER apap ei 176 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Note the 3D model of bulb is cube Too many bulbs will slow down the speed The model of lamp cluster appears as a whole entity Special effects Twist Angle of two baselines only effective to closed 2D polyline Tig g i FR aa 3 3 f f a f Pas E z s ie i f J f 4 p TN 2 Drop slope CVVUVV SERVE TEP a 177 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 Reverse path direction howe The neon light setting uses a 2D line as baseline to create a 3D neon light The 3D neon light already has its properties This setting can be used to create neon light and lighting decoration Basic operations of creating neon light TypeB 1 Set one piece of wall as elevation Select 3D model gt 3D Text gt Text In the popup dialogue box enter the letters Lighting Options Type Lighting Parameter Select Baseline Radius of Neon Tube ls 2 Select Virtual Reality gt Advance Cancel 3 In Lighting Options dialogue box select Type B which is neon light Define lighting parameter 4 Click Select
167. example enter 1000 for x green means the object moves 1000mm in positive direction on green axis The object will move simultaneously as you input the value Remember to click Apply button on the panel after your adjustment otherwise it won t be saved Note You cannot use Reset button to cancel your changes after you click ins one Apply Also you can use mouse to drag the object Move apy Reset the cursor to the yellow square on the axis it will become a blinking yellow cross Hold left key of your mouse and drag the object will move along the corresponding axis If you drag the yellow square at the origin point the object will move along the plane containing the green axis and blue axis Click Rotate button in the Edit dialogue box or right click in workplace select Rotate in the menu Y Move Rotate Scale Mirror Construction A red circle indicates the object s rotation You can enter value in the edit panel or drag yellow points on the red circle to rotate 317 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Press space bar to switch rotating axis as shown below Drag the yellow origin point to change rotation center When rotation is done click Apply to Save e Click Size button in the Edit dialogue box or right click and select scale a red rectangle will appear You can input values in the panel for your desired size or drag yellow squares on the red rectangle to do instant scaling
168. f the selected one by the ceramic size The tiling mode is to continuously oblique tile the ceramics in the rectangle stretched by the mouse and the system will automatically work out the ceramic quantity required Press the F key then it will tile the whole region in the current tiling mode A Drag mode B Select mode Left click at an appropriate position and then the tiles will be tiled according to the dragging status before final selecting New tiles will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style Note The biggest difference between Continuously straight tiling and Continuously oblique tiling lies in the generating direction Choose Continuously straight tiling to generate tiles along the direction of tile edge Choose Continuously oblique tiling to generate tiles along the direction of diagonal line of tile 3 4 5 8 Interval Oblique Tiling Basic operations 1 60 Right click on target tile and then choose Interval oblique tiling in shortcut menu Move the mouse and the system will show the tiling dynamically by a square box with the same size to that ceramic The ceramics will be tiled along the two diagonals of the selected one by the ceramic size The tiling InteriCAD T5 User Manual mode is to tile the ceramics at intervals in the rectangle stretched by the mouse and the system will auto
169. form using two methods 1 Single click on the Show All button to show all the objects that are hidden 2 If you just want to show one or two objects you need to activate Select Hidden option first and then single click on the position of the object The selected object will be showed in green Right click to confirm your selection 321 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Note You must activate Select Hidden option when you want to show the hidden or wireframe objects Otherwise you will not be able to select them 9 7 16 Hide Unselected Select Hide Unselected trom object menu click to select the object you don t want to hide right click to confirm 9 7 17 Hide Object Select Hide Object from object menu click to select the objects you want to hide right click to confirm 9 7 18 Hide Surface Select Hide Surface from object menu click to select the surface you want to hide right click to confirm 9 7 19 Show All Select Show All from object menu and all hidden objects will be shown 9 8 Material The material information of BtoCAD can all be loaded into InteriCAD VR BtoCAD cannot set some special materials such as stencil texture map transparency map etc We can easily change the model material in InteriCAD VR and use suitable material from the library to assign to the model directly Also the diffuse reflection texture maps of all the materials can be displayed immediately All the operations are simple an
170. g Hide and Show from Door Window menu The Hide command can hide one or more doors and windows selected while the Show command display all the doors and windows including all currently hidden and 112 InteriCAD T5 User Manual unhidden doors and windows 4 6 6 Add the Door and Windows into the Library After you finish the preparation work the door and windows drawing can be added into the library and becomes an element for further use lf all the six preparation steps mentioned above have been done the new added door and windows will be the equivalent with the original in the library and all the operations are same Before adding the door and windows into the library please ensure that no other drawing is in the Windows so that the accuracy of the slide will not be affected In addition 2D layer should be visible if there is plane icon so that the drawing of the door and windows plane icon can be selected Basic operations 1 Open the system library interface switch to the user library and press the right button and select Add Library 2 In the Selection Type dialogue box select Door and Windows in Type and press OK 3 Inthe Input Data dialogue box assign the names of the door and windows and their materials Assign the file name that will be used to save the door and windows drawing Assign the customize object as door or window and press OK 4 Select the boundary curve of the door and windows 5 Select all t
171. g the drawings in the workspace Basic operations 1 Click Pan in the View menu 2 The mouse automatically moves into the workspace The drawings move to the direction that the mouse points to For example if you move the mouse downwards the drawings will be moved downwards if you move the mouse to the left the drawings will be moved to the left 13 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 After scaling to a proper degree click the right button and then select View None from the properties menu 2 5 5 Zoom in Function zoom in the objects in the workspace Basic operations Click Zoom in in the View menu or click button in the tool bar 2 5 6 Zoom Out Function zoom out the objects in the workspace Basic operations Select Zoom out in the View menu using the left button or click J button in the tool bar 2 5 7 Hide Show Image Function show or hide all images inserted by the Insert image command in the workspace Basic operations Click Show all images hide all images in the Draw menu and then the system will show or hide all images in the draw area You can quickly portray a drawing without affecting the final plot effect that is use the Show image command to show all images and take them as an assistant when portray a drawing when export the final 2D effect drawing hide all images so that they will not influence the final effect Note Properly using the two functions you can quickly portray a drawing
172. ge size 800x600 JPG only is required There is no side view for this model A minimal image size 800x600 JPG only is required M There is no back view for this model A minimal image size 800x600 JPG only is required There is no 3D perspective view for this model A minimal image size 800x600 JPG only is e Feedback o Cancel 3 Click Feedback and you can continue to upload the necessary material 415 InteriCAD T5 User Manual for the model 4 Meanwhile you can also write down your comments to YFCAD once you have any question about the models Feedback If you think the model is unacceptable please indicate your opinion Iv Size e V Apperance Select Y Color Texture Select Y Other Type your comments here Submit Cancel HTE AO 1 26PM 5 Click My Model to check the progress Finished models will be shown here 416 InteriCAD T5 User Manual tl aah ine My Order My Model Sample 101 Ok Time 20 100727111829 Download Feedback 6 System will automatically download the model from YFCAD once it is finished However you can click Download to download the model again if you can not see it in the Online Cloud Library xi My Order My Model Sample101 Ok iModelService Time 20100727111829 A Download ok Download Feedback 7 Enter VR 3D of InteriCAD T5 and switch to Online Cloud Library
173. he 2 Select a curve wall 3 Input the depth of the niche You can input this value directly from the keyboard or by selecting two points using mouse 4 Select the base point of the niche s outline This point will be used to locate the niche 5 The system asks you whether to locate dynamically or non dynamically 117 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Input Y or N to choose one approach for locating e f you select to locate dynamically then you can specify the position of the niche in an intuitive way 1 Locate along the arc of the curve wall Move the mouse and on the wall the niche s outline will also move following the cross cursor along the arc of the curve wall Move to the appropriate position and click the left button 2 Locate along the direction vertical to the arc of the curve wall Move the mouse and on the wall the niche s outline will also move following the cross cursor along the direction vertical to the arc of the curve wall Move to the appropriate position and click the left button e f you select to locate non dynamically then you must enter a value to designate the position of the niche 1 Locate when the niche is vertical to the wall input the distance from the base point of the niche to the bottom of the wall 2 Locate when the niche is horizontal to the wall input the distance from the base point of the niche to the start end of the wall The following example shows the situation to niche on a
174. he Query tiles section various conditions are available for tile searching such as Code Size Type and Color The meanings of query conditions are as follow Code the unique id of a tile that allocated by manufacturer Input product code in the input box or click the button beside the input box and choose one in the pop up dialog box Once this input box is filled other input boxes become gray except the input box of Menu is still available for searching To activate other input box you need to remove the content in the input box of Code Note If the input box of Code is blank that means do not specify code Menu name of tile manufacturer Input manufacturer name in the input box or click the button beside the input box to choose one in the pop up dialog box Note If the input box of Code is blank that means do not specify manufacturer Size Width X Length Input tile size in the input box to query If only inputting either the value of width or length all the tiles that match this value can be searched out For example by inputting 300 in the input box you can search out all the tiles that are 300mm wide or 300mm long Also you can click the button beside the input box to choose one in the pop up dialog box Note If the input box of Code is blank that means do not specify tile size Type all product types can be found in the drop down list Note By choosing Not specify that means do not specify product type 53 InteriCAD T5 Us
175. he drawings that make up the door and windows including the 113 InteriCAD T5 User Manual plane icon if available 6 Assign the base of the door and windows The system will automatically add the drawing into the library and generate its slide If necessary you can make a new slide to cover the one generated by the system the same position with the saved graph file 4 7 Elevation Decoration The wall decoration plays an important role in the room decoration InteriCAD provides a variety of solutions for wall design including complete finishing types abundant partition methods and various styles of plates which enable you to decorate wall with ease All of the elevation decoration methods finish partition and plate are valid to straight walls only For curve wall you must build an equivalent wall and then decorate the equivalent wall finally map the decoration to the corresponding curve wall through the Resume function 4 7 1 Elevation Setup Generally a wall is vertical to the world coordinate system WCS There are certain difficulties and troubles in processing the vertical walls in that position such as snapping a point or drawing a line on the way However if we set up a user coordinate system UCS and work it on the elevation then all operations will be same to those in the WCS 4 7 1 1 Elevation Setting There are two way to set elevation set up the user coordinate system vertical to the world coordinat
176. height When deploy you can also input the Bottom elevation 11 At Special Height by unit When locating product you need to select the cupboard unit and the location where the product will be placed in the cupboard The distance between the ground and the bottom of the product equals the specified height When deploy you can also input the Bottom elevation 12 Under Special Height when locating product you need to select the position point The distance between the ground and the top of the product equals the specified height When deploy you can also input the Bottom elevation 13 Inside Electrical Appliance when locating product you need to select the diaphragm or the baseboard to place the object and the product will be deployed on the selected diaphragm or the baseboard For example the electric oven etc 14 Free Orientation by surface when locating product you need to select the position point One specific installation surface will automatically snap with one surface of another object in the scene And the product will automatically absorb on this surface For example the wall map and the decoration plant etc 15 Auto fit size when locating product you need to select the door panel which is parallel to the product This is suitable for Roster and so on 16 Over under Shelf board selected When locating product select the shelf board that you want to put the product on the product will be located on the sele
177. height and thickness You can change these values by using attributes edit function For more information please refer to Wall attributes editing 4 3 1 1 Build a New Wall Note Provides the simplest and most accurate ways to build a wall including Straight wall curve wall and rectangular wall which the wall distance may be between inner walls center walls or outer walls Basic operations 1 Select New wall from Structure menu Draw linear wall Wisth i2z0 ber C Center 2 Select Straight wall Curve wall or Rectangular wall Then set the width and height of the wall finally select left line centre line or right line as require 3 Draw the wall with in the plane window and press Enter after completion 4 3 1 2 Build Walls Using Grid Base Grid base method is a faster way to build a set of straight walls 89 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations 4 Select Grid base wall from Structure menu 5 Select grid base used to build walls 6 Right click to finish and the system will analyze the selected grid base to generate linear walls 4 3 1 3 Build Walls Using Line Base Construct a wall by using line base method either by straight or curve wall The wall line can only be line or curve any other objects will be filtered Basic operations ls 2 3 4 90 Select Line base wall from Structure menu Select straight line or curve to be used as line base Press En
178. hen Move You can see a prompt Select a surface Left click that surface to be edited After selecting click the right button or press Enter to determine This selection operation is completely the same as that of ACAD Left click a point as the base point for moving Move the mouse and you can find that the texture mapping also moves following the mouse then click left button to confirm the modification Rotate texture mapping coordinate From the Material menu select Editmap then Rotate You can see a prompt Select a surface Left click that surface to be edited After selecting right click or press Enter to determine Left click a point as the center point for rotating Move the mouse and you can find that the texture mapping also rotates following the mouse click left button to confirm the modification Scale texture mapping coordinate From the Material menu select Editmap then Scale You can see a prompt Select a surface Click that surface to be edited using the left button After selecting click the right button or press Enter to determine This selection operation is completely the same as that of ACAD Click a point using the left button as the base point for scaling and then click another point as the reference point Move the mouse and you can find that the texture mapping also scales following the mouse Mirror texture mapping coordinate From the Material menu select Editmap then Mirror You can see a pr
179. ht from the Virtual Reality menu 2 Select the object you want to set as light Multiple selections are supported Note Only those objects with Face attribute can be set as light For example a line or polyline can not be set as light Meanwhile models taken from the library need to be exploded before being set as lights Note Selected object s will become light source Each reflecting the equal amount of light in terms of color and intensity Intensity Color System HSV z 1 p Hue ooo fi ED saturation 100 B iness 3 Fill in the value for the light in the pop up dialog System provides two types of colors HSV and RGB 7 2 Advanced Lighting Using advanced lighting function users can create lamp cluster neon light and 174 InteriCAD T5 User Manual pearl light YF Basic Operations for TypeA 1 Draw two lines as the basic lines of lighting 2 Select Virtual Reality gt Advance 3 In the Lighting Options dialogue box click Lighting Parameter to define the color and wattage of light Note the wattage is the summation of all bulbs 4 Click First Baseline and select one of the lines 5 Click Second Baseline and select another line Note once a line is selected None will turn into Selected 175 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Lighting Parameter First Baseline one Second Baseline ONE Stars Along Paths 20 Stars Between Paths 20 Twist Angle 0 Drop Slope 0 90 5 R
180. iCAD T5 User Manual move and copy the selected object to another place Detail information of three modes Object mode No cat but with model information Z View y Material mode With preview and configuration of the material View 0 Object E Material Q Lighting E Apply Texture Material HC0S Texture Brightness 0 6500 Lighting mode No preview but with lighting configuration E View 5 Object 8 Material w Lighting E Apply x Lighting Source Type Photometric Web Power 2 0000 Lighting Type Luminous flux Beam Spread 0 7854 Falloff 0 1000 a To show and hide the preview and information 4 After selecting an object and click Apply dialog box will be shut down and the plane turn into Copy model move the plane to the position for the model do the same operation as inserting library model Right click to end Copy material Click the surface of the targeted object repeat the operation 278 InteriCAD TS User Manual for different objects for the same material Right click to end Copy light source Click the surface of the light source repeat the operation for different lights for the same configuration Right click to end 5 If you want to copy different object please select Copy Object from the Products Library menu Note e The same as the other operation material and light editing can be done after radiosity but object editing needs to be done before radiosity e Inthe object mode
181. iate node left click to set as insert point Type in path and file name in the popped up save dialog click OK to finish 9 5 10 Create Entity Select Create Entity from Products Library and then a dialog shows as below 273 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Please double click or q Directory structure Preview Window coe The dialog consists of 3 parts Directory structure List view and Preview window 9 5 10 1 Directory Structure Right click on an item of the directory structure users could delete the item modify the item or add a sub item 9 5 10 2 List View Load an existing entity Left click on the icon in the List view and then click Apply InteriCAD T5 will load the group into 3D view The models will move along with your cursor Left click to confirm position Objects loaded in the group will be treated as one object unless they are broken apart by Explode Entity function 274 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Add my entity Left click Add button and then input name of the group in the pop up dialog InteriCAD T5 will switch to 3D view Select the objects hold shift key and left click for multi selection right click to finish 9 5 10 3 Preview Window By left clicking on the preview window you can enlarge the picture in a pop up window E Cancel 275 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 5 11 Explode Entity Select Explode Entity from Products Library
182. ic the new tile can be same or different from the original please choose Cancel New created tile is complete its shape may be different from the original 2 Choose an option in the dialog box according to the explanation and schematic diagram 3 Click OK button to apply the setting 3 8 Tiles Quotation 74 InteriCAD T5 User Manual A lefa X B Workdesk Product search Usage statistics Area p regions y Refresh report Print report Manufactor Code Spec Waste Ratio uantity Price Amount SystemLib YFE40002 400x400 0 05 1 0 00 0 00 Edit data Product information Statistical method o Waste coefficient Unit price This function is integrated in the worktable First press the Spacebar one time and it pops up the Worktable dialogue box and then select the Tiles Quotation tab Second directly click the Tiles Quotation command from the Pave menu In the pull down menu of Region the system records all the region names automatically The sheet below is the ceramic usage report list each row of which records the usage of each kind of ceramic Each time you add a region to the system add ceramic slices to a region or delete ceramic slices from the picture system will automatically update the ceramic usage report list Or you can click the Refresh button to make the modification valid real time Methods for ceramic usage statistic System provides two methods for ceramic usage statisti
183. ic match color and selecting for ceiling floor and walls in a scene a House Livingroom plan e From Material menu select Random Material l and a dialogue box shown as the following appears 3 Auto Change Color e Right click on the ceiling to set the Ceiling Surface Ceiling surface In the popup menu fall Surface select Ceiling surface ES Change Color Select Map Restore origin meterial Clear map 344 InteriCAD T5 User Manual eo Repeat the above to set floor and walls Expert match color El i Room Style e In the Room Style select corresponding mario pi y House Livingroom plan scene room i House Bedroom Business Uffice House Ki tchen Click Auto change color button House Dingingr oom House Bathroom e Now the scene automatically applies some plan in the library to replace materials of ceiling floor and walls At the lower part of the dialogue box you can see the plan number currently used e Click Stop button to stop selection and now you can input a satisfactory plan e Shown as the following figure input 4 in the field then click forward or backward button to switch to plan 4 E lt E gt 20 Manually forward A O Livingroom planD5 A e You can also click the arrow button to browse all plans and choose from them Intelligent Color Rs Expert match color z Room Style House Livingroon pla y AE ce Pre Page lt lt fl gt gt 28 A 1
184. ighlighted yellow color 3 After selecting right click to finish the selection 4 Follow the instruction to define the start point for mirroring and at the same time it shows the displacement of the mirrored object relative to the source object 5 After mirroring to the proper position left click to determine the position of the mirrored object 6 Adialog prompt Keep the original object or not select Yes to keep the original object select No to delete it 2 4 8 Erase Select Edit gt Erase Select the object to delete Right click to delete or press Esc to cancel 12 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 82 5 View 2 5 1 Full Screen Function Adjust the current workspace to display all placed objects in it Basic operations Click Full screen in the View menu or click J button in the tool bar 2 5 2 Zoom Window Function customize a rectangle area and maximally display the objects in it Basic operations Click Zoom window in the View menu or click button in the tool bar 2 5 3 Zoom Function zoom in or zoom out the objects in the workspace at any moment Basic operations 1 Select Zoom in the View menu 2 The mouse automatically moves into the workspace Moving upwards the mouse is to zoom in the objects while moving downwards the mouse is to zoom out the objects 3 After scaling to a proper degree right click and then select View None from the properties menu 2 5 4 Pan Function dra
185. in case of necessary Step 1 Select the kitchen cabinet unit from the Select Product dialogue box 2 The width depth and height of this product will be displayed in Select Product dialogue box User can modify them as requirements 3 Select Layout to deploy the kitchen cabinet unit And the unit size is the new size input by the user e Locating Method of the Product The system provides total 19 product locating methods For different product there are one or several locating methods First select one locating method then click Layout to layout the product Below is detailed description of the 19 locating methods 1 On the ground the bottom elevation of the product is O from the InteriCAD T5 User Manual ground This locating method is suitable for dining chair table and freezer and so on 2 On toekick the product will be located on the plinth The height of the plinth can be edited in Setting gt Parameter setting This locating method is suitable for base unit tall unit island and so on 3 At wallunit elevation the bottom elevation of the product will be the same as the bottom elevation of wall unit The bottom elevation of wall unit can be edited in Setting gt Parameter setting This locating method is Suitable for wall unit extractor hood and so on 4 On worktop the product will be placed on the worktop The defaulted height of worktop is 850mm This locating method is suitable for cup dishes and cattle an
186. in current selection the Edit Light Source dialogue box will be displayed as the following image Name Unnamed Type Spot Light C RGB a ME CK 0 97 O Power 10 00 watt Light Source Type electricity saving Target Spot H 90 00 Pick Target Spot Vv 90 00 Beam Spread 45 0 _ _ Fallot 0 50 W Direct Calculate Show Selected Only Switch Of Eps Ww Global Setting Length Y Global Setting There are two options for next step 1 Choose an item from the pull down menu of Type all selected light sources will be change to one type 2 Remove certain light sources to make current selection contains only one type of light source Below is the instruction of the light source parameters Name The name of the current light source 358 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Type You can select the type of light source general light target spot and day light entrance RGB Use red green and blue system to adjust the color of the light source HSV Use the hue saturation and value system to adjust the color of the light source Power This is the intensity of the light source lts unit is related to the physical type of the light source For example wattage is the unit of lamp power Source Type The type here refers to the physical type of the light source For example the incandescent lamp and fluorescent lamp that are both of 100w the latter is much brighter than the former bec
187. in the perspective workplace of InteriCAD VR 9 3 6 Import 3DMax Model 1 Insert SetMaxPlugin Make sure that you have installed 3ds Max software in the computer you run the SetMaxPlugin suitable version Discreet 3dsmax 6 Discreet 3dsmax 7 Autodesk 3ds Max 8 Autodesk 3ds Max 9 Autodesk 3ds Max 2009 In the InteriCAD installing process the installation program automatically runs the SetMaxPlugin if you want to manually run the plugin please double click the SetMaxPlugin exe icon to install 3 Appoint the 3ds Max version and installation path in the pop up dialogue box then click Setting to complete the set up Set 3DMAX Plugin Select 3DMAX Directory for examale c 3dsmax6 Setting sit Setting Later Current 3DMAX Version Current YuanFang Software Version G EX C InteriCAD6000 TC rx InteriCAD6000 EN C 8 x C InteriCAD 3000 C 9X C InteriCAD 9 C 2009 C InteriCAD T3 C 2010 4 The following dialogue box shows that you have successfully installed the plugin 217 218 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3DMAX plugin e i y Succeed to set 3DMAX 3DYIZ plugin 2 Export MTF format file in 3ds Max 1 Open 3ds Max model 2 Select export from File menu choose Export Selected if you want to convert some parts 3 Inthe pop up dialogue box appoint the saving path and a name 4 Select 3DMax YF mtf mtf in the Save as type menu click Save to complete the conversion 3 Impo
188. in the Ceiling list click Patch base line and you will see the base line will be changed Merge wall When you finish the ceiling select Merge wal to extend the wall to the ceiling There are two methods to create a slope ceiling Note Plain ceiling can only be created by method 2 Method 1 By parameter 1 Select Slope Ceiling and select method 1 2 Select slope ceiling parameter you could also input a value to define the parameter 3 Input the figure as the elevation 4 Click Add ceiling and then pick point according to the prompt in the command window right click to finish and the ceiling will be generated in green You could turn to perspective view to check it 239 InteriCAD T5 User Manual EJ MGXVR Unnamed File View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling LightSetting Render Animation Optimize Help ad le alaa Ble aja dl Ss OBSOs A N EE SONES ceiling height 1000 elevation 2800 edit select ceiling Merge wall Command Command Please click contour point nil El a Pal 5 05PM 5 Create another slope ceiling on the left side 240 InteriCAD T5 User Manual L MGXVR Unna File View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling LightSetting Render Animation Optimize Help ade ea Ble ala e Sy BOOBS RARA A EEE i w ny AS meth
189. in the drawing 4 Repeat step 3 to build more columns Otherwise press Enter or the right button to finish 4 5 4 Freestanding Round Column 103 InteriCAD T5 User Manual You can insert the round column in any position The operation is the same as the square column 4 5 5 Delete Column This operation is for deleting the column 84 6 Doors and Windows The system provides a variety of door windows and accessories and editing tools The door windows library is open to users and you can add in self defined styles to it 4 6 1 Insert Doors and Windows There are more than 200 types of door and windows in the system It also provides various kinds of curtain frame doorpost door handle curtain and partition Now we take door and partition as examples There are two methods to create door and window Operations Method A 1 From Door Window menu select Library 104 InteriCAD T5 User Manual _Door and Window Width Pick Point Height Pick Point Pick Point Pick Point Select a style of door and windows from the library and double click it In the Door and Window dialogue box input the parameters of the door and windows The meanings of each field in the dialogue box are clearly shown through the drawing in the picture Select a wall in which the door and windows will be inserted Along the wall the distance from the door and windows to the wall endpoint is displayed dynamica
190. ine Wall H Q TY gt nn ms al re Wall decoration 1 Material lt UVidnt specify matenal yet gt Single door Template file Dual door Push door Collapse door Balcony door Window Bay window GridDoor hd nr SS Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Wall decoration rule 223 InteriCAD T5 User Manual You can define the material of wall behind the object you select You can also set the map size of the texture you defined Note this function will only work when you have put the relative objects for example TV cabinet next to the wall Create template e orat on rule setting Template file General setting Wall Wall decoration 1 Single door Dual door Push door Collapse door Back Wall of TV cabinet v Balcony door EE Window Bay window Map Lenath 500 Width 500 GridDoor Y F Add Del Edit rer p Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel 2 4 E Single door Default System will automatically generate single door after selecting a template This door is made of a door panel with a texture on it Frame Decide whether to generate frame for the single door Door sill Decide whether to generate sill for the single door User defines This option enables user to define thickness material and even handle model mrm for the single door Door model You can define a VR model mrm block instead of using only door panel
191. iner the sky is Preview button can preview the condition of the background Click Exit button Day Light Setting 362 il Select New Light from Light Setting menu and then select the window glass to set as light source From Light Setting menu select Sunlight Setting Activate Activate Sunlight Effect Note This option must be activated or day light will have no effect Single click Exit button From the Light Setting menu select Edit Light Select the light source on the window and set its type as Day light opening Determine the incident angle of sunray using Pick button Then exit Note when using this method to calculate the radiosity use the default activated Calculate sunlight through option to raise the efficiency of radiosity calculation because the outer wall of the model will not be calculated in radiosity calculation Only the day light within the board shape light source boundary will be calculated The advantage of method 1 is that it is simple to set and is suitable for the scene with multi windows Its disadvantage is that the setting of day light direction is not visual and the efficiency of radiosity calculation is not high The advantage of method 2 is that the setting of day light direction is very visual and is suitable for the scene with one or two windows Furthermore its efficiency of radiosity calculation is high Its disadvantage is that one more board should be built when InteriCAD T5 User Manua
192. ing to the manufacturer and the product code update the same products in two databases and add new absent products 6 Show All Function show all the data in the data window Usually it is done after query 7 Show Picture Function show the picture of the item selected in the data widow 3 9 2 Add Ceramic to Database 1 Click the Add button and then a row of record will be added to the data window automatically The Code column of the new record is automatically set to 0 and all the other properties will use the data of the last product recorded in the data window The cursor is automatically located at the Code column User can input the manufacturer name directly from the keyboard or select it from the drop down list If there is no need to modify the Factor then you only press the Enter key If it is a new manufacturer then its name will be saved in the drop down list box for later use Note the data cannot be empty otherwise it will prompt that there is an error and the data cannot be saved 2 Press Tab or Enter ion the keyboard to enter the next Code column The column usually is set to 0 Make sure that this column is not empty and it can determine the unique product in the database by combining with the Factor column After inputting its value press Tab or Enter to enter the next column 3 Input other product properties The recording examination of different product properties may be different but their operation modes
193. ion dialogue box will pop up Epslion Subdivide Y Global A Epslion l Global Indirect Subdivide M Global Canca e Default precision follows global setting Remove ticks before Global and input appropriate precision value 409 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Chapter 10Online Cloud Library Online Cloud Library is a brand new system developped by YFCAD aiming to provide more efficient customized modeling service to individual users Introduction Online Modeling Service contains 3 parts Make Model Check Model and Recharge e Make Model This is for submitting model information e Check Model This is for checking the progress of modeling Users can also send their feedbacks about the model to YFCAD e Recharge This is for the basic cost of the service Basic Operations Part1 Make Model aL iModelService exe 7 1 Double click destop icon BASSE or icon under InteriCADT5 Ilmodel iModelService or to run the application 410 InteriCAD T5 User Manual ModelService ONLINE MODELING SERVICE Internet access is required for this service 2 Fill in the detailed information of the model Those blank boxes with should not be empty Model Information Name Sphere Brand YFCAD ID foo Manufacture YFCAD Country China Price fo Width 500 mm Deepth 500 mm Height 500 mm lt Back Next gt 3 Click Next to continue or click Back to go
194. ion f R di A O ti Stop Running After times W Radiosity adiosity Option Stop Running Ater minutes Precision Raytrace Option C 7 Cc Y Direct slion irec Image Size Subdivide pa Epslion Indirect Subdivide Sky Method O a a i Camera List Parameters Antialias Pixel Point y Antialias Quality en Raytrace Max Depth 56 vs F Auto Brightness Save MRS File When Finished Make Script File Cancel Y Quick Mode Disable Blurred Effect F Shadow Prediction Below are detailed instructions of Batch Render dialog Radiosity Option Button To show the Render Parameter option dialog for radiosity These options will be used to the renderings to be saved Raytrace Option Button To show the Options dialog for raytrace These options will be used to the renderings to be saved Radiosity Check Box If you have run Radiosity Lights On and get satisfied result please cancel the check box otherwise please tick the check box and setup options for radiosity with Radiosity Option button Image Size Size of the renderings to be saved Camera List A list of cameras that are saved with View gt gt Save Camera They could be copied to Render Cameras by gt button or removed from Render Camera by lt button Batch Render function will saved a rendering for each camera that is copied to Render Camera Auto Brightness Check Box To decide if Batch Render adjusts brightness of the renderings automatic
195. ion principle of Tiling direction 1 and Tiling direction 2 The slices selected by Tiling direction 1 and Tiling direction 2 also are main slices Considering the slice from which two directions are drawn their unit sets must be adjacent to determine a unique position relationship That is in order to determine the position of repeated units you should specify Tiling direction 1 and Tiling direction 2 63 InteriCAD T5 User Manual As what the following figure Shows there are totally six slices in three units The red arrow indicates Tiling direction 1 while the green arrow indicates Tiling direction 2 In this graph we perform operation according to the bigger slice in the middle unit Y Specify tiling direction 2 5 Click Additional slices button and select all the slices subjected to the main one to form a unit set 6 After selecting all the additional slices right click to end selection The additional slices are not essential to the tile plan If you want to quickly tile ceramic slices by using the Free tiling function just like the simplest continuously tiling mode you can use a single slice to tile without any additional slice You only need to select slices in two intersected directions which is actually to specify two repeating directions and distance 7 Return to the Free Tiling Settings dialogue box and Click OK button 8 Drag the cursor and the system will automatically work out the slice quantity required an
196. is a kind of black and white picture whose supporting formats include JPG BMP and TIF It requires that the black part of the picture be pure black while the white part is pure white lt can use the black and white pattern to control whether to display source light or not The black part can display it while the white part cannot display it Basic operations 1 Open the Material Editor 2 Switch to Emit label 3 Click the Texture button of emit texture mapping 4 Select the required pattern file by browsing Transparency Stencil Eump Emit Wave 4 d Texture o Wave effect Wave effect can be used to simulate water wave effect Basic operations 1 Open the Material Editor 2 Switch to Wave label and set the following parameters 335 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Transparency Stencil Pump Emit Wave Humber s ie Wave feo 00 Wave fo 30 Center ti fe fs fa 5 FB A fo 00 Y fo 00 Z jo 00 Wave numbers specify the number of the wave source center points for example if the value is 1 then it is equal to the effect of throwing a stone into the quiet lake surface If the value is greater than 3 then you basically cannot see the location of those wave sources Center it is the coordinate location of wave source Usually you need not to adjust it Wave length the distance between wave crests Wave amplitude it is the wave amplitude Wave effect 9 8 2 Material Library InteriCAD
197. items in that of subdirectory They are Copy to Move to and Delete option Copy to Copy the directory and all the subdirectories to another library For example copy one directory from the system library to user directory Users are not allowed to copy directories to a same library for example copy a directory in user library to another directory of user library Operations After you click Copy to and choose the destination directory from the window below 268 InteriCAD T5 User Manual ECT troup ng Standard Library system_library Ki benie n Concealed wardrobe Electric_appliance Lighting Carpet Furnishing Partition Office furniture Office_equipment Other Home_furniture Floor_marble Ceramic Mosaic Floor Wallpaper Paint Fabric Wood Marble door_and window bed l FRESIA se Cancel Move to Move the directory and all the subdirectory to another library For example move one directory from the system library to user directory Users are not allowed to move directories to a same library for example move a directory in users library to another directory of users library Operations After you click Move to choose the destination directory from the window below Delete Delete the directory and all the subdirectory under this directory 9 5 3 14 Right on an End Directory 269 53 Mosaic 9 Office_equipment sg Office_furniture 9 Other 53 Pai
198. jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 31 SystemLib YFA100005 white 1000X1000 common 6Xsp001m jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 32 SystemLib YFA100006 white 1000X1000 common 6XSP013M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 33 SystemLib YFA100007 white 1000X1000 common 6XTP001M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 34 SystemLib YFA100008 white 1000X1000 common 6XTP003M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 35 SystemLib YFA100009 white 1000X1000 common 8 12XtP003M jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 36 SystemLib YFA100010 white 1000X1000 common 8XTP003M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 37 Systemlib YFA100011 white 1000X1000 common F80680P JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 38 SvstemLib YFA100012 white 1000X1000 common F80860P JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece a This interface is divided into two parts the first part is the function buttons area at the top which integrate all the data maintenance functions the second part is the data window which displays the data of the ceramic library User can also add his own product information here 3 9 1 Function Buttons 1 Add Function add new item of ceramic data to the database 2 Delete Function Erase the selected item from the database 3 Query Function only display the ceramic data in accordance with the query conditions 77 InteriCAD T5 User Manual in the data window 4 Columns Function set the display mode of ceramic data for example whether to hide some property columns or change the order of property columns 5 Merge Database Function Accord
199. k Select File to change IES file It s not necessary to apply IES to every lamp For example you can use IES on wall lamps leaving alone lamps in the middle of the room IES is defaulted to use direct irradiation which means in raytrace it would generate very sharp shadows You should notice that when using IES to a lamp light source will also leave shadow on the surface of the lamp You can eliminate the shadow by changing the lamp s material which means setting reflection to 0 We can also use texture to realize some special light effects as shown below 364 InteriCAD T5 User Manual This function is to place a glass board with pattern before the target spot light shown in the picture You can make the effect of some stage illuminations easily using this function As you can perform radiosity the effect generated by this function is more real Basic Operations 1 First create a Photometric Web texture mapping file shown in the picture Please note that the pattern that can be projected is the internally tangent circle part of this texture mapping 2 The operation is simple assign this texture mapping to the solid model of target spot light using the method of assigning material directly 3 lts projection boundary is within the divergence angle of target spot light All the patterns in the internally tangent circle part of the texture mapping will be projected There is no need to set the texture mapping coordinate
200. l e Ai Same to rotary door M Horizontal C Offset distance _ a Handle for sliding door t 4 Same to rotary door Horizontal ee Offset distance C sea Handle for drawer 4 Same to rotary door Center up e Select Offset distance Tab Worktop For setting the worktop In this section user can change the thickness and style of the worktop In the red frame there are two new functions One is to set the distance of cabinet back to the wall For example when we set the distance to be 300mm if the cabinet back is 150mm far from the wall the worktop will still be created to attachment to the wall The other is to create worktop that will have distance from other objects such as wall column and cabinet Here we set it to be 7 That means the distance between worktop and other objects are 11 303 InteriCAD T5 User Manual System parameters setting profile e New Delete Rename Copy Handle Worktop Lines Others Worktop Front Edge Height change as worktop thickness Down value H2 o Thick H 140 Y Wood thickness H1 Overhang lo Side edge overhang Wall Seal IY Install wall seal ra li To create wall seal at Side edge LM Height 55 Thickness 116 To create worktop if distance between unit back and wall is less than 300 Clearance between wall and worktop Clearance between column and worktop Clearance between unit and worktop corea Tab
201. l modeling At last we will learn the setting of photometric web An IES file is an analysis of a lamp recording its luminous flux on each direction It indicates the distribution and utilization of light in the space Using IES light source in VR is to use IES file to control irradiation of the source The two barrel lights below used two different IES file Basic Operation Edit Light Sourc 1 Switch type from General Light to Name NewLight Type fies y Fixture in Edit Light Source dialog a CARES i I new window will pop up for selecting an ex mo i IES file The software provides several Power 600 00 jum familiar IES types under Target Spot H 9000 _ Pick Target Spot 90 00 InteriCADT5 vr lES After the IES file is ee A AR ds selected a green wireframe will appear feo x foo OSS Show Selected Only on the lamp to indicate IES irradiation NE O area and energy distribution cesar ciose 363 Note InteriCAD T5 User Manual The light source use lum as its luminous flux unit The actual brightness in scene is much related to the IES file itself Illuminating angle vertical horizontal and pick button have the same function of target spot are used to control the light source s illuminating angle IES can be set as 3 types point surface linear light source The latter two needs size definition for light source The preview of IES is at the bottom left of the dialog Clic
202. l as a BYBLOCK You can do the Edit amp Copy to Color same as to Display 7 Hide This attribute controls object to hide or not in the graph The attribute value is defined as Yes or No You can do the Edit amp Copy to Hide same as to Display 8 3 5 Wall Attribute Edit Dialog box of Straight wall and Arc wall are shown as follow Edit Attribute Name Unnamed Center point 8437 14008 0 Radius 3794 Name Unnamed Starting Point 9016 4136 0 Filling Options No Filling Color BYLAYER Hide No Display 3D At Doors and Windows Open up At Doors and Windows Close in Segment Density 30 Dialog box of straight wall attribute edit Dialog box of arc wall attribute edit 194 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Starting Point amp Ending Point the position of straight wall is defined by Starting amp Ending Point You can change the position and the length of wall by changing its Starting 4 Ending Point Center point amp Radius the position of arc wall is defined by Center point amp IG Wall Height amp Wall thickness the shape is defined by Wall Height amp Wall thickness Radius You can easily discover the change of wall shape by changing the wall thickness from 120mm to 500mm as well as changing the wall height from 3000mm to 4500mm in the following example Filling Option it is used to define whether the wall is solid or vacant Dada At Doors and Windows it is used to define
203. le and then choose Copy in shortcut menu Move the cursor in the region to get a suitable position When moving cursor close to regional boundary or existing tiles current tile will snap to them automatically Press Spacebar to rotate the tile 15 degrees anti clockwise each time Left click to place the new tile It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style Continue to move the cursor Repeat step 2 and 3 to copy multiple tiles Press right button or ESC key on keyboard to end operation 3 4 5 4 Continuously Straight Tiling Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Continuously straight tiling in shortcut menu By moving the mouse the system will show the tilling dynamically by a Square box with the same size to that tile The system will calculate quantity of the tiles automatically press F to pave the whole region in Current way Left click in suitable position to generate tiles with the same size in the specified region the slice gap will be generated as well according to the parameter setting New tiles will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style 3 4 5 5 Interval Straight Tiling Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then
204. lect Array from Object menu a dialog will pop P up as shown right AS 2 Click Select Object to select the object you wish Third Poit m Relative Third Point X Axis G fo 3 Enter value in Relative Second Point for distance Y Axis e 0 between original object and relative object on x y A P z axes This decides the direction and space between objects of the array Enter value in Number column for the number of objects on the array 4 Click preview as shown below to array 5 Click Apply when you re satisfied with the result Note If you enter value for either Second Point or Third Point the software will perform linear array if you enter value for both it will perform rectangle array Copy Object Along Line 310 InteriCAD T5 User Manual You can control the distance between copied object and the origin and copy multiple objects in a single operation i Relative Second Point Basic operations ee 1 Select Copy Object Along Line from Object vs fp i i Z Axis R fo menu a dialog will pop up as shown right 2 Click Select Object to select the object you wish to copy Se 3 Enter value in Relative Second Point for xas TS distance between original object and relative object on x y z axes This decides the cams ff direction and space between objects of the Preview _Gose Aopy copy Enter val
205. lick OK button and then the current image in the new plan region of the system will be used as the plan display icon Note before creating the new tile plan generally you should first finish the titling of the plan and then perform the creation operations for the new plan It also can be understood as the save operation to the current plan in order to call it at the next time Moreover the plan icon displayed in the worktable can reflect the contents of the plan in reality so it is easier to be managed and maintained Of course you can also use the New plan command to construct the tile plan 3 6 2 3 Maintenance Tiles Plan Right click on a plan to display shortcut menu Copy plan Basic operations 1 Choose Copy plan in shortcut menu 2 Input new name for copied plan 3 Click OK button to create new plan Modify plan Basic operations 1 Choose Modify plan in shortcut menu 2 Please refer to 3 6 2 2 New plan for the following steps Delete Basic operations 1 Choose Delete in shortcut menu 71 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Click Yes to delete the plan from library Change image Note this function only changes the preview image of a plan Basic operations 1 Choose Change image in shortcut menu 2 Find a Jpg format image in the pop up dialog box 3 Double click on target image to replace the original one Save image as Basic operations 1 Choose Save image as in shortcut menu 2 Specify stor
206. linear wall and a curve wall 118 AN A j Ee N InteriCAD T5 User Manual lf you want to modify the existing niche for example to change its form position depth and the bisection precision of the niche s outline etc you can use the attributes editing Refer to Niche Attributes Editing for more details 4 7 3 Decoration The system provides a variety of finishing as wood panel plaster strips marble tile and marble slab bricks layer fabric panel and wood lath The decoration form and location is relative to the following factors e Type different model units determine the forms of different finishing types e Boundary all kinds of finishing are applicable to a closed area The closed area can be defined with line arc polyline ellipse and SPLINE The curve used to define such closed areas is called boundary When selecting a boundary those invalid boundaries will be automatically filtered by the system e Inner point the boundary can define one or more closed areas The inner point indicates which closed area the finishing will be inserted into e Projection point this is a referenced point for location when arrange the finishing The layout of the finishing model units in the boundary is based on the projection point 4 7 3 1 Wood Panel 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Wood Panel 2 Inthe Wood Panel dialog box input all required parameters and press OK 119 InteriCAD T5 Use
207. ll show Split by material To split multiple object into several object by its material Assign first material Assign the first material of this object to the whole object Don t assign a material In this way the material will be lost But it will save the geometric graph of 3D Studio file The transferred object will InteriCAD T5 User Manual be allocated a default material in AutoCAD Basic operations to import 3DS file Select File gt ImporVExport gt 3DS Import Appoint the 3D Studio file in 3D Studio File Import Options dialogue box Define the parameters in 3D Studio File Import Options dialogue box Click OK re y f 3D Studio File Import Options x Available Objects Selected Objects Object Name Object Name Delete AJOS DECIS PUN V Save to Layer Mult Material Objects By Object O 9 Always Prompt P By Material M Split By Material S C By Object Color B Specify the First Material F gt Single Layer L C No Material N 7 9 Import 2D Design Files Basic Operations 1 Select File gt Import 2D Design file 183 InteriCAD T5 User Manual i Please select 2D file Look in IF Documents 62 em Name Date modified Type Size Tags de 3dsmax de ACDSee Photo Editor di Adim P Camtasia Studio Lo FFOutput HunSpell di Magic Briefcase di My Adobe Captivate Projects de My eBooks Je My Received Files di Notes di O amp O de PDF files de Tencent Files Le The KMPlayer de AR
208. lly Locate the position of the door window A new door or windows is created on the wall in a default orientation System will ask you whether to turn it inside or outside and to turn it left or right The default answer is N The position of the door and windows doesn t change while being turned lf you want to continue to insert the same door and windows into other walls repeat step 4 6 Otherwise press right button or Enter to finish Operations Method B 105 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Select Door Window menu gt Insert 2 A prompt to define door and windows will appear in which you can set the size and offset distance You can press Select to choose models from library like Method A or press Pick value to copy a model from the existing doors or windows 3 Press OK and pick a wall to insert the door or window The operation will be same as method A 4 6 2 User Define Window User define window can be designed and imported into virtual reality Operations 1 Draw the shape of door or window as you prefer External contour line and internal line must be included and created in PLINE Remember the external contour line must be closed Example shown as below The outline must be closed f j f Inside line must be Pline 3 Y 2 Select Door Window menu and then User Define Window 3 Define Parameter including size outside frame and etc 106 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 Click Pick or Select wind
209. long the line default value is 5 After setting these parameters press OK then in the draw area a Set of ceiling lights is arranged along the line each with a small red dot InteriCAD T5 User Manual Linear lights Skip first Skip last Skip both ends light E a 2 8 6 Show Ceiling Hide Ceiling Function show or hide all ceiling objects in the draw area including ceiling framework individual ceiling and ceiling light etc The function can facilitate the user s design through showing or hiding ceiling objects anytime and enable user to easily select locate and edit objects Basic operations Select Show ceiling Hide ceiling in the Room menu using the left button and then the system will show or hide all ceiling objects in the draw area 2 9 Layout Furniture Once the room design is finished you can choose the furniture from the library and layout into the house 31 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Furniture layout El User library i Online Cloud Library User library E System Library E Home Furniture KW B 0002 CG A 214 560 520 89 860 500 260 3800 600 2267 Sanitary Ware Plant Household Electricity Appliance Interior Decoration Office Furniture Door and Window Structure ee Ma CG B 296 CG B 215 CG C 215 E CR R 2700 2840 2238 2700 2840 2238 3450 2100 2238 Electric Fitting Home Furniture Collection European Furniture Collection Kitchen and Bath Collectio
210. losed area and displays it in a red color line framework in the draw area 29 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 8 4 Ceiling Lights Function arrange ceiling lights one by one in the draw area Basic operations 1 2 3 4 Click Ceiling lights in the Room menu Move the mouse cursor to the workspace and you can see a prompt asking you to determine the Location of ceiling light Left click a proper position to determine it The lights will be attached to the ceiling automatically Repeat the above operations to arrange other ceiling lights until finish A ceiling light is displayed with a small red dot in the draw area 2 8 5 Linear Ceiling Lights Function arrange ceiling lights along a line in the draw area Basic operations 1 2 30 Click Linear ceiling lights in the ceiling menu Move the mouse cursor to the workspace and you can see a prompt asking you to determine the First point of the line Click the left button at a proper position to determine it Move the mouse to another position It appears a prompt asking you to determine the Second point Here it dynamically displays the displacement between the two points Click the left button at a proper position to determine the linear track Then the Ceiling light dialogue box pops up The dialogue provides four ways for arranging ceiling lights including average among the line skip start skip end and skip both Also you can set the number of ceiling lights a
211. ls 5 The function of Auto button is to have the system calculate an appropriate brightness automatically 9 11 8 Light Adjustment without Radiosity From the render menu single click Light Adjustment Without Radiosity command Basic Operations InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Drag the Brightness slider to adjust the brightness of the whole scene and the preview picture will change without delay The usage is visual 2 Drag the Exposure slider to adjust the exposure of the whole scene 3 Drag the Contrast slider to adjust the contrast of the whole scene 4 Drag Black and White sliders to adjust image levels 5 The function of Auto button is to have the system calculate an appropriate brightness automatically After using radiosity the effect of this command is completely the same as that of light adjustment command 9 11 9 Environment Setting e From the Render menu select Environment Setting O Set corresponding parameter in the appeared dialogue box Ambient light intensity is displayed in scientific counting method The default value is 5E 005 lf you want to increase the ambient light you can adjust the value to 1E 004 so that the light intensity can be increase Environment Setting Ambient Shinning Ground Brightness Factor 1 Cancel O Save the final result until you are satisfied with the effect 9 11 10 Reset Radiosity In some situations you need cancel the radiosity computation that
212. ly the value is O e Vertical axis angle the inclination between the longitudinal axis and the horizontal direction Normally the value is e Add add Number and Dimension parameters to the end of the corresponding list Insert if one item has been selected in the list insert a new item before it Delete if one item has been selected in the list delete it Modify if one item has been selected in the list use a new one to replace it Reset Reset all the data in the dialogue box A sub dialogue box will popup to prevent unintended operation e Single direction When this option is active the generation method of the axis changes to single direction and South end West end and East end become unavailable The position and angle of the grid on axis in the single direction is determined by the base point and horizontal angle 3 Select a point in the view port to specify the insert point of the grid on axis Examples of grid on axis the data in these examples is shown in the above dialogue box Orthogonal line grid on axis 85 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Orthogonal grid on axis with rotation angle oblique grid on axis 4 2 2 Grid on Center The grid on center is made up of some homocentric arcs and the line segments that pass through the center of the circle Basic operations 1 Select grid on Center from the structure menu 2 Input the parameters in the Grid on Center dialogue box Press OK
213. lyline Function Draw a Polyline on the current workspace floor Basic operations 1 Select Pline in the Draw menu 2 Left click on the workspace to start drawing 3 With a similar way to draw line you can continue to draw until right click to finish But the different is the polyline created in this way will be recognized as a continued entity while straight lines are recognized as separated entities 2 6 5 Text Function write some text in the drawing usually used as complementary description for objects in the drawing Basic operations 1 Click Textin the Draw menu 2 Input the text in the Input data dialogue box Press OK Input data Input text OK Cancel 2 6 6 Horizontal Dimension Function measuring the distance between two points in horizontal line Basic operations 1 Click Horizontal dimension in the Draw menu 17 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Move the mouse cursor to the workspace Click one point as the first point Then move the mouse to another position A prompt will be displayed to ask you to determine the second point and dynamically shows the distance between the two points Click at a proper position to determine the second point 3 As the starting and ending points have been defined you can click an empty space nearby the line Now you can see the dimension is created 2 6 7 Aligned Dimension Function to get the distance between two points also called oblique dim
214. m Elevation menu select Niche 2 Select a profile for the niche outline It must be a closed shape like circle rectangle etc 3 Input the depth of the niche You can input this value directly from the keyboard or by selecting two points using mouse 116 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 Select the base point of the niche s outline This point will be used to locate the niche 5 The system will ask you whether to locate dynamically or non dynamically Input Y or N to choose one approach for locating e lf you select to locate dynamically then you can specify the position of the niche in an intuitive way Move the mouse and the niche s outline will also move following the cross cursor along the wall area Move the mouse to the appropriate position and click the left button e f you select to locate non dynamically then you must enter a value to designate the position of the niche 4 Locate when the niche is vertical to the wall input the distance from the base point of the niche to the bottom of the wall 5 Locate when the niche is horizontal to the wall input the distance from the base point of the niche to the start end of the wall lf you want to modify the existing niche for example to change its form position depth and the bisection precision of the niche s outline etc you can use the attributes editing Refer to Niche Attributes Editing for more How to niche on a curve wall 1 From Elevation menu select Nic
215. mat to save the InteriCAD VR file at any state For 201 ____ _ Ar er software usability all the settings in ACAD rendering module can be read in InteriCAD VR but some special materials and lighting can only be set under InteriCAD VR In addition radiosity and raytrace technology in rendering calculation makes the design natural and realistic A procedure of Virtual Reality e Build 3D model scene using Modeling Design function of InteriCAD T5 or 2D drawing using InteriCAD 2D Design e Import the 3D model scene or the 2D decoration drawing created by InteriCAD 2D Design into InteriCAD VR o Make further design of the 3D scene in InteriCAD VR such as adjusting model materials and setting light of the scene e Multiplex output by raytrace and radiosity technology BtoCAD Import to Further Design amp Radiosity 3D Model VR Adjustments 2D Design Raytrace 3DmaxM odel Multiplex output Image Panorama 3D Image Projections from all angels 9 2 InteriCAD VR Interface and Command Function This chapter introduces InteriCAD VR interface functions and all the commands 202 InteriCAD T5 User Manual InteriCAD VR interface The InteriCAD VR interface is composed mainly of menu bar tool bar workplace and command window control panel and status bar Menu Bar Tool Bar _File View Products Library _ Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling Light Setting Render Animation Optimize Help i f AP Sie iy titi ADA
216. matically Restore Select a library from the directory and click Restore A dialog will pop up to ask you whether overwrite the library Click Yes to confirm click No to cancel Merge Select a library from the directory and click Merge Select an mdb from the pop up dialog The system will merge the mdb to the selected one automatically 9 5 5 Import VR Block Use this command to import independent VR Block 1 Select Import VR Block from Products Library 2 Find the VR Block you wish to import in the popped up dialog 3 Click OK and move cursor to the position you wish to insert the block 9 5 6 Export Surface You can save your own block as importable VR block and add to the library There are two methods to export export surface and export object You can use this command to export specified surface as VR Block 1 Select Export Surface from Products Library 2 Select Snap On from Object menu activate snap mode to select insert point 271 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 Select the surface you wish to export hold Shift to add more right click to finish 4 Select insert point of VR Block Move cursor in snap mode will capture nodes of objects the nearest node to the cursor will be highlighted in yellow lines Find the appropriate node left click to set as insert point 5 Type in path and file name in the popped up save dialog click OK to finish 9 5 7 Export Object You can save your own block as imp
217. matically work out the ceramic quantity required Press the F key then it will tile the whole region in the current tiling mode 3 Drag mode B Select mode 4 Left click at an appropriate position and then the tiles will be tiled according to the dragging status before final selecting New tiles will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style 3 4 5 9 Offset Tiling Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Offset tiling in shortcut menu 2 Choose offset direction in the pop up dialog box The diagram shows the paving effect Uncheck H shaped Tiling to input offset distance 61 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Offset tiling setting Offset direction TA y Define offset distance Cancel Y H Shape tiling 3 Move the mouse and the system will show the tiling dynamically by a square box with the same size to that ceramic The tiling mode is shown in the graph in the dialogue box The ceramics will be offset tiled by rows or columns according to the ceramic size in the rectangle stretched by the mouse and the system will automatically work out the ceramic quantity required Press the F key then it will tile the whole region in the current tiling mode 3 4 5 10 Free Tiling The Free tiling can realize almost any tile plan According to this statement the shortcut tile plan
218. modification and then click the print icon in the toolbar to print it Note before printing or the usage report has not been updated automatically you can press the Refresh button to display the correct data 3 9 Ceramic Database Management By using this function users can use their own products into the system database modify or delete the records in that database 76 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select the Tiles Database from the Pave menu a Products Manage Tool window pops up as follow LE Products Manage To El Add X Delete dh Query J Columns Show All Ba Merge Database Eh Search Pictures Show Picture 1 System Lib YFA80001 white 800X800 common 180 JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 2 System Lib YFA80002 white 800X800 common 194 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 3 System Lib YFA80003 white 800X800 common 195 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 4 SystemLib YFA80004 white 800X800 common 197 jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 5 SystemLib YFA80005 white 800X800 common 6Xsp001m jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 6 SystemLib YFA80006 white 800X800 common 6XSP013M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 7 SystemLib YFA80007 white 800X800 common 6XTP001M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 8 System Lib YFA80008 white 800X800 common 6XTP003M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 9 SystemLib YFA80009 white 800X800 common 8 12XtP003M jpg 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 10 Systemlib YFA80010 white 800X800 common 8XTP003M JPG 0 00 XHB 1 0 00 piece 11 SystemLib YFA80011 white 800X800 common F80680P JPG 0
219. modified Camtasia Studio 8 26 2010 6 24 PM HunSpell 9 4 2010 4 53 PM microsoft 8 25 2010 6 56 PM My Received Files Date created 8 25 2010 6 56 PM Ly PDF files Folders IdentityCRL spori Export the list to excel format In the popup dialogue designate the location and input the file name If the list is more than one page you can Then click Save Export to Excel file File name E Content Current page All page ma print Print out the list It s better to set the printer before you try to print 281 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Print area Property f all copies fi Define table 1 3 5 7 Define page 1 2 4 8 auto pagination Contineous print Print saves to file Current Page 1 All Pages 1 Print Scale 80 ORNER corner CORNE sofa011 sora DEMO TEMA Copy Rights Guangzhou YuanFang Computer Sohware Engines Ld seting Detail settings of the list including the printer setting 282 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Page setting Row Column Print Row Print 3D properties Print all units including hidden units Y Print background pic undo Erases the last change done to the list edo Reverse the undo command Delete the selected line Add a line to the last line template Save the changed template 9 6 Kitchen Design 9 6 1 Show Library This part mainly introduces how to perform the
220. mpts whether to change the door direction Press Enter if the door direction is correct and input Y press Enter and the door direction will be corrected automatically The system prompts whether to change the door direction The method is the same with door direction Thus a door is installed If necessary continue to select walls to place the same door Otherwise press Enter Example selecting wood line Draw the trace line should be a polyline of the wood line grain before 165 InteriCAD T5 User Manual selecting wood line le Abt maintain a Thre H Common 41 4 Door Windows 50 shape at ceiling com pillar iss Mo HandRail bse Mo HandRail pillar 3 Mo fence CJ wood line ff electric wood line e pene ri ri 01 Jo di a ai line 3 n wood line wood line wood line Y ig gt 54 objects Current is D MGK ACAD LIB LINE WLINEDO4 dwg Z a Double click structure and wood line in the list area b Drag the sliding bar in the preview area and find the required wood line c Double click that wood line symbol The parameter dialogue box of wood line popup Set the Profile thickness Profile height press Enter 166 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Molding iia Unit X 28 1706 Pick Unit Y 60 0535 Pick Profile Segment 0 c Path Segment Rotation Angle 16 2 D Symbol Outward Cancel d The system prompts Select a polyline to select the path of
221. n Office Furniture Collection Insert single piece of furniture 1 Select the furniture from library Double click the preview image to confirm the selection You can input single piece of furniture or furniture sets 2 Move the mouse to locate the furniture Press Space bar to rotate the furniture Note When you insert a furniture set you can tick on the Explode check box to separate the components of each piece of furniture from the set If not the 32 InteriCAD T5 User Manual furniture set will be edit as a whole set after insertion 82 9 1 Edit the Furniture Right click the furniture the edit menu will show love seatD03S Move Rotate Free rotate Copy Change size Elevation Furniture aline Delete Cancel The commands of Move Rotate Copy Color and Delete are same as the ones in edit menu The command of Rotate has a step rotation of 15 degree while in the mode of Free Rotate the item will move freely with the mouse movement Change size Enter the new size in the Size dialogue box Furniture Dimmension Length 2700 Width 2840 Height 2238 Iv Scale cous If the Keep size scale is ticked once one of the sizes is changed the rest will be changed If this item is not ticked then you can enter length width and height one by one Elevation 33 InteriCAD T5 User Manual In the popup dialogue box enter the elevation of the furniture Elevation Elevation
222. n building the staircase You can use these two polylines as the base line to generate the staircase handrail The polyline offset can either be a positive or negative value A negative value means that the polyline has been drawn out of the staircase 5 4 3 Staircase Base on Center Line 158 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Construct an equal width staircase using a given curve as the centerline Basic Operations 1 Select Create Stair by center line from 3D Model menu 2 Select a curve as the centerline of the staircase areatestaimbiicenteniine Side width Offset handrail baseline Width Cancel 3 Input the total height of the stair 4 Input the height of the step 5 Input the side width width of the platform surface of both sides 6 Input offset value of handrail baseline 159 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 5 4 4 Spiral Stair Construct a spiral staircase by defining relevant parameters Basic Operations 160 Select Spiral Stair from 3D Model menu Input detailed info about the spiral stair in the pop up dialog You can also define the details of each step by clicking on Preference Define a point in the working area by Pick Point SPlfalistalf Case Parameter Height of Flight Radius Inner Radius Outer Rotate Degree Number of Steps Details Preference Direction O Counter Clockwise Clockwise Y Pillar On Center Insertion Point Pick Point lt InteriC
223. n function InteriCAD VR can be reflected 375 InteriCAD T5 User Manual One ambient light performs main No ambient light all the lightings are lighting effect in the scene received using radiosity calculation Save time Take more time than the former Raytrace after Radiosity eo After you perform radiosity to the scene you should perform raytrace preview calculation first UA A e Single click Raytrace button dl or use Partial raytrace switch to Raytrace label to get the result more quickly Raytrace Photon Map Raytrace Raytrace Max Depth 5 Antialias Pixel Point g Antialias Quality 13 E Shadow Prediction e Quick Mode Disable Blurred Effect eo As itis preview calculation it is ok to use the quick default method e Single click the OK button the system will perform raytrace calculation to the perspective workspace If you are not satisfied with the effect for example the mirror effect of the material is too strong you can modify the property of the material directly Save the final result until you are satisfied with the effect Raytrace before Radiosity UM A e Single click Raytrace button gt or use Partial raytrace to get the result more quickly o As itis preview calculation it is ok to use the quick default method e Single click the OK button the system will perform raytrace calculation to the perspective workspace If you are not satisfied with the effect for 376
224. n the dialog 406 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Mesh Size Grid Factor Delay Redraw AutoSave AutoSave Time 130 Minutes AutoSave Prompt e Enable Cancel 9 13 2 Optimize Option Set the minimum length of patch Basic operations 1 Select Optimize Option from Optimize menu then the Optimization Option dialog will pop up 2 Set the Min Cut Length for optimization click OK to confirm 9 13 3 Optimize Model For large sized models or non optimized 3D MAX models if frequently used might lead to excessive size of MRS file Optimize Model function can be used to decrease surfaces of the model without prejudice to the appearance of it hence to improve the calculating speed Basic Operations 1 Select Optimize Model from Optimize menu and then left click on a model right click to confirm 2 Enter a value in the pop up dialog box This value will determine the ratio between the surfaces of optimized model and those of original one E g value 60 means surfaces for the optimized model is 60 to the original one It is recommended that the input value range is between 30 and 90 407 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 Click OK to start calculating The calculating time is depended on the complexity of the model 4 After calculation the automatically pop up dialog box will display optimization result click Yes to keep the result click No to ignore it 9 13 4 Optimize Display lf our current operation affects the di
225. nce between the curtain and the wall Upper Space Decide the distance between the upper edge and the wall Bottom Space Decide the distance between the bottom edge and the wall Material You can define material for the curtain Model file You can define a VR model mrm for the curtain 228 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template H Balcony door Default E Window User Define Window frame Side Space 300 Distance to Wall 80 i Windowsill Curtain Upper Space 150 Bottom Space 200 Bay window Window frame Material E Windowsill Curtain Curtain Model z lt lt E GridDoor Wall hole H Ground v 4 T IT Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel The setting of the Bay window is similar to the setting of the single window Whole hole Default System will automatically generate whole holes according to the default setting Generate Lamp Decide whether to generate lamps in the upper edge of the wall hole Generate Sill Decide whether to generate sill for the wall hole Wall Hole MRM You can define your own model mrm for the wall hole 229 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template E Bay window M Default i Window frame Er A ara ds Windowsill Curtain WallHoleMm a GridDoor Door frame Door ground Wall hole Wall hole frame E Wall hole sill LAAJ E Ground Ground stage 4 pr 8 p Open Pick up l
226. nd to attach it to some object in the scene Basic operations 1 After selecting a material click Set material button 2 Then left click the model surface that is to be attached by this 337 InteriCAD T5 User Manual material You also can drag it to the model surface Open Function it is used to open material library file file format mlb You can simultaneously open multiple mlb files each of which will generate a user defined material library You can find their corresponding library files 9 8 3 Fit Map For painting and carpets etc the size of texture mapping coordinate is completely consistent with the maximal size of object surface You can use this command to conveniently process such kind of texture mapping eo From the Material select FitMap e You can see a prompt select a surface Select the rns surface to be adjusted Click OK and a dialogue box Sn a Degree appears shown as the following East C South C West North Number e Input an angle in Orientation for rotating texture mapping The Number indicates how many texture mappings will a be filled to that surface T Group e Mirror U direction and V direction Cancel 9 8 4 Edit Map A InteriCAD VR can carry out the following edit operations to texture mapping 338 InteriCAD T5 User Manual coordinate 1 Move texture mapping coordinate From the Material menu select Editmap t
227. nd use polyline command to draw one polyline as the path of the camera and the other polyline as the path of the camera target point 398 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Switch back to the InteriCAD VR interface From Animation menu select Select Path In the pop up dialogue box select Set Path For Camera Path For Target option Then from Camera Height single click Select Path button and then the system will switch to Modeling automatically Under the prompt of Select camera path select the already drawn polyline as the camera path The height of polyline drawn directly in the plane drawing should be 0 But the height of the camera path should not be 0 It is recommended that the starting height of the camera should be around 1500 to simulate the height of a people s eyes So the default setting is ok From Target Height single click Select Path button Set the target path using the same method of setting camera path The height of the target path should be the same as the camera path in most cases So there will be the effect of plan view Input the total number of frames of the animation Single click the OK button Basic Operations of Setting Camera Path and Target Point as Fixed Point Switch to Modeling and use polyline command to draw one polyline as the path of the camera Switch back to the InteriCAD VR interface From Animation menu single click Select Path In the appeared dialogue box select Set Path For
228. ndicates that the function is on otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF status of the Angle function by checking or unchecking it Wall Snap Function It is an auxiliary drawing tool When building the wall you can see there is axis on the end point of wall It not only help you to view the X direction and Y direction but also snap the exactly point of the wall Basic operations lf there is a mark near the wall snap command in the Setting menu it indicates that the function is on otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF status of the Wall snap function by clicking the Wall Snap command in the Setting menu Grid Snap Function lt helps you to snap at the grid in the working area You can change its size from Setting gt Grid Setting Basic operations If there is a mark near the Snap at Grid command in the right corner it indicates that the function is on otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF 38 InteriCAD T5 User Manual status of the Grid Snap function by checking or unchecking it 2 10 5 Setting of Snap Default settings of three auxiliary drawing tools including grid length and angle Snap setting Length snap step 50 Angle snap 15 0000 Degree Cancel 2 10 6 Image Insert Point Setting Function making the insert point of the graph then get the exactly position of graph You can see the detail in the nsert file command Basic operations 1 Click the Set the image insert point in the Set
229. nding order while the downward arrow indicates to sort by a descending order Also you can click the right button on the corresponding table head and it pops up a shortcut menu Click the Ascending or Descending command to sort Column Replace The Column Replace operation is very dangerous and the content replaced by this command cannot be restored so it is recommended that the user should not perform this operation if not necessary 1 Specify the whole column to be replaced and right click on the corresponding table head in the data window It pops up a shortcut menu 2 Select the Column Replace command and it pops up the Column Replace dialogue box Column Replace ma l Cancel 3 Input the content to be replaced and press the OK button to replace the 81 InteriCAD T5 User Manual whole column or press the Cancel button to abort replacement Note because each code has to be unique it is not allowed to replace the Code when you use the Column Replace function so as to prevent disastrous result Chapter 4 Basic Structures This chapter introduces some basic structures in InteriCAD T5 including wall elevation door and windows ceiling and floor etc and also provides detailed description on the setup and modification to them 4 1 Modeling Interface EN File Draw Edit Structure Door Window Elevation Ceiling Floor 3DModel Dimension Virtual Reality Window Other arajaaai n 10 a Leg ing o SE CE A
230. ness Turn on off auto brightness function Basic operations Click File gt Setting gt Auto Brightness gt On to activate it Click File gt Setting gt 245 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Auto Brightness gt Offto turn off it Vr Option Reset the parameter of VR Basic operations Click File gt Setting gt Vr Optionto open the VR option dialogue Mesh Size It is to reset the size of mesh in VR Grid Factor It is to control the render speed of VR It has been set to be the optimum location Delay Redraw It is to reduce the refresh of VR drawing By use this function the software can run faster in computers with low configuration AutoSave It is to activate the auto save function AutoSave Time It is to reset the time for auto save AutoSave Prompt It is to set whether to show the prompt or not before saving Use Animate Cursor InteriCAD VR provides a series of animate cursors to display different status of the software Recommend for use Basic operations Click File gt Setting gt Use Animate Cursor You could use object editor to see the effect of animate cursor 9 3 14 Toolbar Manager 1 From the File menu select Toolbar Manager 2 Tick off the toolbars from pop up dialog box the relative toolbars will be disappeared 9 3 15 Exit Select Exit in the menu bar that means to exit 3D design system Note If the current file has been modified then it will display the Save dialogue box 246 InteriCAD T5 Us
231. ng function It should ensure the consistency of the wall area when using this function The decoration must be mapped to the wall area that an equivalent wall has been built for otherwise distortion will occur Basic operations 1 From Elevation menu select Curve wall then Bending 2 Select the decoration on the equivalent wall that will be mapped to the curve wall 3 Select two points by which to define the length of the equivalent wall and the base point for decoration 4 The two points are better located at the bottom endpoints of the decorated side of the equivalent wall Only that the curve wall will be exactly decorated without any distortion 5 Select the curve wall to be decorated 6 Select the side of the curve wall that the decoration will be mapped to 7 Select the number of the curve parts 4 7 6 Move on Elevation This function is similar to Move function It is used for moving object vertically While moving the object please make sure you are using WCS Select the object you want to move and then define the base point and location on the 128 InteriCAD T5 User Manual evlevation view 4 7 7 Display Control of Elevation Objects When drawing with complex model you should control the preview of different drawing in various views to keep the workspace terse For the elevation decoration it is unnecessary to show the 3D drawing in the top view you only need to show the boundary Instead it is nec
232. nt 23 Partition 3 Wallpaper sj Wood al Import Model Single 3 M CJ o Import Model Multi 3 0 Import Texture lp O J F Hew Group FP Rename Ea vi Copy to Y Y Move to J di Delete a PREM Besides New Group Rename Copy to Move to and Delete you can see Import Model Single Import Mode I Multi and Import Texture It means that you can import texture and models by right click the directory too 9 5 4 Library Backup Use this command to backup the library in system Select Library Backup from Products Library A Library Management dialog will pop Up 9 5 4 1 VR Library Management Backup Select a library from the directory and click Backup A Browse for Folder dialog will pop up Select a folder to save VR library click Ok to confirm The system will back up the selected library automatically Restore Select a library from the directory and click Restore A dialog will pop up to ask 270 InteriCAD T5 User Manual you whether overwrite the library Click Yes to confirm click No to cancel Merge Select a library from the directory and click Merge Select an mdb from the pop up dialog The system will merge the mdb to the selected one automatically CAD Library Management Backup Select a library from the directory and click Backup A Browse for Folder dialog will pop up Select a folder to save CAD library click Ok to confirm The system will back up the selected library auto
233. nt for you to call the grouped light source E g Three groups which are 1 2 3 have been grouped in the scene and you can select group 1 by simply clicking key 1 on the keyboard The combination of groups is also very convenient For example you want to combine group 1 and group 2 Single click key 1 on the keyboard to InteriCAD T5 User Manual select group 1 and press SHIFT 2 So the group 1 and group 2 have been selected Then press CTRL 1 again to combine the two groups into one group Modification of Light Group You can simultaneously modify the parameters of the selected light Sources Basic Operations First select the light source that will be adjusted from a group or directly choose multiple light sources The operation is same as adjusting single light source except the use of Pick button It can focus the illuminating center points of several target spot to one point Shown as the following figure E O ES A The target spot light do not fit to this condition you can use horizontal and vertical sliding bars of the incident angle to adjust it 9 10 5 Lighting List Display all lights list in the scene After selecting you can enter the Edit light menu Select Lighting List from Light Setting menu The Light source list box will pop up 367 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Light Source List Mew Light Jnnamed nnamed nnamed Jnnamed nnamed Close 9 10 6 Smart Light We have induc
234. ntersected but unparallel The system automatically decides which end of walls will be filleted according to the selected point Whether the fillet operation will be successful is also relative to the fillet radius If the radius is too big the operation will be failed This function is only applicable to straight walls Basic operations 1 Select Edit wall from Structure menu then Fillet 2 Select the first wall Note that the selected point should be close to the end to be filleted 3 Select the second wall Note that the W wH selected point should be close to the end to be filleted 4 Input the fillet radius lt should be calculated from the wall baseline 4 3 2 8 Offset This function can be used to build new walls with a specified distance to the referenced wall 96 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations l 2 Select Edit wall from Structure menu then Offset Input the offset value It should be calculated from the wall axis Select the wall to be offset Select the offset direction For example if you want to offset on the left side then click there If you want to offset other walls then repeat step 3 and 4 at which the offset value is same to the first time Click right button to finish If you want to offset a curve walls you must pay attention to the offset value otherwise the model will be transmuted For example the curve wall have been offset two times the curve of the last
235. nvironment Setting The scene will automatically set an environment light if you use raytrace before using radiosity And this command can control the brightness of the environment light Reset Radiosity Clear the calculation result of radiosity and return to the time before you use radiosity Plot Area Preview Show how the image will look like when it is saved Save Image Save the image file of effect drawing full view drawing and 3D drawing Additional Scan Continuous Scan based on the previous result Batch Render Select the camera of the scene make auto calculation and save the effect drawing Net Render Server Start Net Render Server Animation Record Record the mouse motion trace as the path of the animation Select path Set the relative polyline as the path or target of the animation Set Path Create the path for camera in VR Load Path Load saved path file and the file format is pth Save Path Save the current animation path that 213 InteriCAD T5 User Manual has been set to a file Preview Animation Preview the animation Make animation Save the animation file Optimize Optimize Surface Reset patches on surface Optimization Option Set the minimum length of patch Optimize Model Reduce the surface of the model Optimize Display Use cuboid to substitute part of or all models to optimize display speed Surface Radiosity Setting Set radiosity of a single surfac
236. ny Height from the Ceiling menu 2 Input the definition data of the recess down light in the Lamp Parameter dialogue box Press OK 141 142 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Installation Method Surface mounted Teadhe ee nnehe pe tededent ns ertenbentesertebes Recessed Reflector Edge Width i 5 Lamp Wattage 45 Light Source Placement las Pendant Depth EJ Cancel Explanation of the parameters e Surface mounted This option is used to import the lamps into VR to render e Recessed This option is suitable for CAD interior rendering e Reflector Edge Width The reflector edge width of the lamp e Lamp Wattage The strength unit of the light source which is suitable for VR and CAD rendering e Light Source Placement The distance that the light source deeps into the recess down light e Pendant Depth Select a point to determine the height of the light and use its Z coordinate value as the light s altitude Select the 2D light symbols that define the appearance of the lights on the plane The X and Y coordinate value is determined by the position of the selected symbols on the plane InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 8 2 3 Convert to 3D on Ceiling Change the plane light icon into the 3D recess down light on the plastering ceiling board Basic operations 1 Select Convert to 3D on ceiling from the Ceiling menu 2 Select the surface of the ceiling board on which the lamps will be placed and de
237. o arrange recess down light complete installation at any height and mounted on ceiling 4 8 2 1 Complete Installation Arrange one or more recess down lights at one time according to the appointed method or path Basic operations 1 Select Create 2D Light Symbols Automatically from the ceiling menu 2 Select the way to arrange the lamps in the Complete Installation dialogue box and input parameters The Complete Installation dialogue box is shown as below You can set the arrangement method total numbers and dimensions of a single lamp in the dialogue box 137 138 InteriCAD T5 User Manual SOMpIEte nS allation Arrangement Other Parameter Shape Lamps horizontal Rectangle y Lamps vertical gt Internal Arrangement Distance X 10000 Pick Point Distance Y 10000 Pick Point Rotation Angle 9 4 FE Radius fs gore Explanations of the parameters Method Select the method to arrange the lamps as explained below e Rectangle method Internal arrangement to arrange lamps in the rectangle area Odd even Arrange the lamps in odd even mode Radius Radius of the lamps Numbers of lamps in horizontal The number of lamps in the horizontal direction of the rectangle area Numbers of lamps in vertical The number of lamps in the vertical direction of the rectangle area Length the length of the rectangle area You can directly input the value You can also click Pick Point button
238. o the negative direction of X axis in ACAD plane drawing 90 degrees correspond to the negative direction of Y axis 180 degrees correspond to the positive direction of X axis and 2 0 degrees correspond to the positive direction of Y axis z Day Light Setting p Environment Sun Ray Direction H 0 00 E Sun Ray Direction v 55 00 Atmospherics Clarity 11 Sunlight Activate Sunlight Effect a iz Skylight Activate Sky Effect Ground Brightness Ground Brightness Factor 1 Sunray vertical sliding bar is to adjust the vertical incident angle of the sunray For example in Summer noon the sunray is basically vertical and the angle is from 85 to 90 degrees while the sunray angle in early morning should be around 10 degrees The background matching with day light is an intelligent module It can be seen as a huge hemisphere There is sky in the spherical surface and the bottom of the hemisphere is ground What ts called intelligent is that the combination use of background and the vertical incident angle of sunray E g when the vertical incident angle of sunray is 5 degrees the background sky is the sky of dusk when the vertical incident angle of sunray is 60 degrees the background sky is the sky 361 InteriCAD T5 User Manual of bright blue Atmospheric controls the sunray degree of the weather The higher the value is the f
239. odi parameter C method2 ceiling height slope ceiling parameter Surface gt fs oo y ceiling height f1000 fi elevation Please click contour point a Please click contour point Please click contour point Please click contour point nil 6 Click Merge wall to extend the wall to ceiling 7 Click cy to Switch to the perspective view and you will see the final effect as following 241 InteriCAD T5 User Manual L MGXVR Unnamed File View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling LightSetting Render Animation G2 them ei _BAIAeaesreou CGeaoetsg SOO Bie RRASAR b e Method 2 By ceiling height 1 Select Slope Ceiling and select method 2 or select Plain Ceiling 2 Input the values of the ceiling height and the elevation 3 Click Add ceiling and then pick point according to the prompt in the command window right click to finish and the ceiling will be generated in green You could turn to perspective view to check it 242 InteriCAD T5 User Manual L MGXVR Unnamed File View Products Library Kitchen Design Object Material Tiling Light Setting Render Animation Optimize Help BI Ble ar BOAON AA WB eB ioe es RE ee bs EFFES slope ceiling parameter E 33 v f ceiling height 1000 2800 slope ceiling C plain ceiling vP ceiling O slope patch base line Merge wall
240. of all cabinet units Basic operations 1 Select Kitchen Design gt Change Handle 2 It will pop up a handle dialog box set up all the parameter Handle Rotary Door Handle Up Open Door Handle Sliding Door Handle Drawer Handle Only modify handle style Install Length 240 x Place Horizontal Place Vertical Position if Auto Calculate Base Right Middle K 36 y E Style o Name gt lt ModelNo gt lt File hntenCADTS kitpre Select 3 Select OK to refresh all the handles in the 3D scene 9 6 11 General Panel The system provides the function of making a simple panel Select Kitchen Design gt General Panel and the Panel modeling dialogue box will pop up in which you can input parameters of a panel such as length width thickness etc Select Horizontal or Vertical and then click the Ok button According to the system prompt select the corner point position and then a panel will be generated 300 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Parameter Board shape Rectangle Board Type lun known Base Parameter Length L 1200 Width WW 800 Thick 20 Elvation of bottom 780 f Horizontal Vertical Frame Parameter R1 0 R2 0 R3 0 R4 0 Cancel 9 6 12 Shelves Panel This command enables you to generate a shelves panel between two vertical Panels Basic operations 1 Select Kitchen Design gt Shelves Panel 2 According to the prompt of system command line select the lef
241. of the software Recommend for use Toolbar Manager Define the display of toolbar Exit Exit InteriCAD VR View Display Mode Texture Display all the texture maps and color 205 InteriCAD T5 User Manual materials Display Mode Color Display texture map and color materials in pure color mode Display Mode Wire Frame Display all the models using wireframe The display speed is fast View Top View Switch to top view Default is to show the whole scene View Bottom View Switch to bottom view View Front View Switch to front view View Back View Switch to back view View Left View Switch to left view View Right View Switch to right view View SW Perspective Switch to SW Perspective View NW Perspective Switch to NW Perspective View NE Perspective Switch to NE Perspective View SE Perspective Switch to SE Perspective Walkmode Make horizontal plane move in the scene You can adjust the position of the viewpoint under special views such as plane view and right view To rise and lower of the movement Spin around a camera object point To move entire object to relative viewing point Click any surface in the scene using the mouse and the camera will automatically aim at this surface The link line between the viewpoint and target point will be perpendicular to this surface 206 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Zoom Mode Zoom You can zoom in or zoom out the view under spe
242. olding Parameter will pop up asking for the parameters of thickness height and elevation lf you choose Auto search baseline system will ask you to pick a point in the room Left click and it will search the perimeter created in the room and create a simple skirting If you choose Select baseline you will need to pick a closed polyline to create the skirting To change the style of the skirting please refer to the command of Attribute InteriCAD T5 User Manual Edit gt Library 84 5 Column 4 5 1 Square Column on Axis You can use the grid on axis to generate the square columns The square columns will be generated in the intersection point of the axis Basic operations 1 Select Square Column from the Structure menu and then On axis Offset Delta_X Delta_Y 0 Ang 0 2 Input the parameters in the Square Column dialogue box Press OK You can use the keyboard to input the dimension parameters of the column or use the slide bar on the right side to adjust the value The result will be displayed in the dialogue box Meaning and function of each field of the dialogue box e Size Y the width of the square column e Size X the length of the square column 101 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e Delta _X the distance that the square column shifts horizontally from the intersection point of axis e Delta Y the distance that the square column shifts vertically from the intersection point of axis e Angle the
243. ompt Select a surface Left click that surface to be 339 InteriCAD T5 User Manual edited After selecting right click or press Enter to determine e Left click a point as the first point of mirror centerline and then click another point as the other point of mirror centerline 5 Copy texture mapping coordinate You can use this command to copy texture mapping coordinate to some objects or surfaces that is copy the texture mapping coordinate used by an object or other surface eo From the Material menu select Copy e Move the mouse cursor to an object surface proving texture mapping coordinate and keep left click the button Sk Now the mouse changes to another icon shown as the following figure Drag it to the object surface on which the texture mapping coordinate will be copied Release the left button and then the texture mapping coordinate has been copied to it Note the copy of texture mapping coordinate is to copy that of on an object completely to B object and this process is independent of their shapes But A and B must be in same coordinate system 9 8 5 Reset Map When some fabric material has been assigned to a sofa you should also control how its texture is presented on that model for example the texture size and texture mapping mode As long as this material has used color texture mapping we can control how this color texture mapping Wraps the model A Four types of texture mapping coordinate The mode fo
244. on insert an image jpg format into the drawing area for drawing the floor plan To use this command you need to scan the real floor plan and save it as jog format Basic operations 1 Create a new file Click Insert Image command in Draw menu 2 In the popup Open dialogue box choose the JPG file of the floor plan 3 The system will ask you to locate the image Move the mouse to a proper location Left click to locate the image 4 The system will automatically adjust the image to a proper size A dialogue box will pop out and ask you to adjust the ratio Click Select reference point 5 The system will ask you to select first point 6 The system asks you to choose the second point Drag the mouse and choose the right endpoint of this dimension 7 Inthe popup Actual Size dialogue box enter the actual size of this line Then click OK Change map ratio By changing the display scale of the drawings drawings can be adjust to the same size as the Click choose reference point button then select two points type the real distance between two points Note The selection can only be horizontal or vertical Choose reference point Actual size 20 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 6 10 Insert Image Frame Function insert an image frame into the drawing area for the floor plan Basic operations 1 Click Insert image frame in the Draw menu 2 Select an image frame type 3 Set the map direction and sele
245. ond corner point The range contained in the two corner points is the area to insert those plates The system automatically inserts the plates as much as possible according to the selected range and the number of plates 4 7 5 Curve Wall Decoration It is difficult to directly decorate a curve wall compare to straight wall You can solve the problem the by following steps first build an equivalent wall of a curve wall then arrange the decoration on the straight wall finally map it to the curve wall 4 7 5 1 Building an Equivalent Wall An equivalent wall is a straight wall with its length same to the arc length of a corresponding curve wall Since the two walls have the same length the relative position and dimension will not be changed when the decoration on the equivalent wall is mapped to the curve wall by the function Bending This is the mechanism of equivalence Basic operations 1 From Elevation menu select Curve wall then Convert 2 Select a curve wall or a curve line 3 If you select a curve wall then you should specify which side the system will build an equivalent wall If you want to decorate the curve wall on the inner side then select inner side of the wall and vice versa 4 Specify the left endpoint of the equivalent straight wall and decide its 127 InteriCAD T5 User Manual position 4 7 5 2 Bending The decoration on the equivalent straight wall can be copied to the curve wall only by the Bendi
246. ons another dialog shows to tell T5 if preview the animation or not right now After the operations above you can 1 save the path 2 preview the animation 3 make an animation 9 12 4 Load Path select Load Path from Animation and then a dialog show as below to get the file to be loaded File name m Files of type Animation Path pth Cancel Open as read only 9 12 5 Save Path Select Save Path from Animation and then a dialog show as below to designate the folder and input the file name to save the path 402 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Save as type Animation Path pth v Cancel 9 12 6 Preview Animation Switch to wireframe mode after you set the animation Then single click gt Preview animation In the appeared dialogue box remove the activate status of Disable speed con option which means do not use speed control and preview the animation at the fastest speed that the computer can run Constant Speed at 30 Frame sec Constant is set to 30 in common cases Single click OK and the preview starts lt is allowed to switch to color mode or texture mode during preview Right click to stop the animation preview 403 Bb oO N 404 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 12 7 Make Animation After the animation preview completes From the Animation menu select Make Animation Set the save path and file name in the appeared dialogue box Set
247. ork out the distinctive tile plans During the course of tiling once the ceramic being dragged is intersected with the existed ones in the region the superposed part should be cut The ceramic cut style may be one of the two options shown as the following dialogue box Ceramic cut style Ceramic cut style defines in which way the dragged ceramic will be set in ey the region x Cancel Two cutting methods available for tiling Note The old ceramic will keep scale new ceramic will be cut by the old Method 2 Cut old ceramic Note New ceramic will keep shape old ceramic will be cut by the new The different cut styles may get different results You can select either according to your needs Basic operations 73 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Pave gt Tiles Cut Style 2 Choose an option and click OK button to apply the setting 3 7 5 Tiles Create Method The ceramic create style is mainly used in the slice whose shape has been changed usually been cut It determines whether to tile the ceramic slice by its original shape or to keep its shape unchanged when you want to tile it in the region If you want to tile it by its current shape then the system will ignore its original shape When you want to select the tiling mode for the ceramic slice that has been cut you should set the create style Basic operations 1 Pave gt Tiles Create Method Batch generate ceramic When dragging to generate new ceram
248. ortable VR block and add to the library There are two methods to export export surface and export object You can use this command to export specified objects as VR Block 1 Select Export Object from Products Library 2 Select Snap On from Object menu activate snap mode to select insert point 3 Select the object you wish to export hold Shift to add more right click to finish 4 Select insert point of VR Block Move cursor in snap mode will capture 212 InteriCAD T5 User Manual nodes of objects the nearest node to the cursor will be highlighted in yellow lines Find the appropriate node left click to set as insert point Type in path and file name in the popped up save dialog click OK to finish 9 5 8 Renew VR Block Use this command to change attributes of VR block in the library 1 2 Select Renew VR Block from Products Library Select modified block a save dialog will pop up You can handle blocks one ata time The software will find the block s path in the library automatically Click Save to finish 9 5 9 Export Whole Scene Use this command to export all objects in the scene as a VR block 1 2 Select Export Whole Scene from Products Library Select Snap On from Object menu activate snap mode to select insert point Select insert point of VR Block Move cursor in snap mode will capture nodes of objects the nearest node to the cursor will be highlighted in yellow lines Find the appropr
249. ortcut in order to better save your time This function will help you to add command shortcut manually 200 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 8 4 2 Camera Camera determines the view by simulating optical characteristic of human We call the view generated by Camera as Perspective You can not zoom in zoom out spin etc to view the graph in the Perspective All the relative commands can be found in __ VWitualReality Other ax Camera You can get toolbar of Camera at top 9 7 right corner of the screen It is shown as follow 8 4 2 1 Set up New Camera 5 H a gt Se You should appoint a lay out position amp an aim of the camera when editing a new camera Operational Procedure of Setting up New Camera Choose Camera from the toolbar and click New Appoint a lay out position of the camera Appoint an aim The lay out position amp aim are defaulted as 1600mm After finish setup the system will automatically generate a side glance view as the new camera s view a a ee Chapter 9 Virtual Reality 9 1 Overview Virtual Reality Short for VR is the render engine of InteriCAD It fulfills rendering function whose mainly tasks are related to photo rendering in the system such as renderings animations etc InteriCAD VR is a completely independent rendering platform All the operations related to rendering such as edit materials set lighting can be completed in InteriCAD VR You can also use your own data for
250. osity and reset radiosity On the other hand User can not edit blocks after radiosity This is an obstacle for improving User s work efficiency For this reason InteriCAD T5 developed the Instant Render technology to show lights while editing improves User s work efficiency greatly Steps 1 Select Instant Render On Off from Render menu It is set to off at default Clicking this command for the first time turns on Instant Render the next time turns it off 2 When Instant Render is turned on the software will display real time light effect But this mode supports only point linear surface light source in Target Spot type and IES light source 3 In this mode you can move freely with lights on and do all kinds of edit 4 After you have done any edit to light or edit to object that would significantly change light effects remember to select Instant Render Refresh trom Render menu to update light effects 9 11 5 Instant Render Refresh Update light effects after any edit has been done to light Basic operations Select Instant Render Refresh from Render 9 11 6 Set Background 379 InteriCAD T5 User Manual This mode is used in interior design Select Set Background from Render Background Option dialog will pop up 1 Sky This is the default background mode which will show the background in blue 2 Color You can change the background color you want in this mode 3 Texture You can select a jpg tif or bm
251. ost four orientation points The system can automatically generate four shot lamps on 369 InteriCAD T5 User Manual the appointed positions which shoot to the four orientation points The default value of lamp height is 2200mm and power is 40 watt 9 10 9 Special Light 2 Select Special Light 2 from Light Setting According to the prompt select the position of the lamp and then orientation points You can select at most four orientation points The system can automatically generate four shot lamps on the appointed positions which shoot to the four orientation points The default value of lamp height is 2200mm and power is 500 watt 9 10 10 Delete Special Light Select Delete Special Light trom Light Setting and then the system will delete all special lights in the scene 9 11 Render 9 11 1 Start Radiosity When performing render calculation the light essre 9 Render Method calculation can be the same as that of the physical world reflection When the light C Stop RunningAfter 1 times C Stop RunningAfter 30 minutes Precision illuminate a surface it will be reflected by the surface again until the light attenuate amp Normal High CUserDefned a Epslion ie 05 completely a Subdivide 300 e Epslion e 005 Indirect Subdivide 600 Sky Method After the scene has been prepared front and back surface material and lighing have all been Indoor C Outdoor set you can perform ra
252. ote Sky Setting command must be activated when rendering exterior environment For sunshine effect please choose Activate Sunlight Effect and Activate Sky Effect For cloudy weather please choose Activate Sky Effect When you choose Outdoor in Sky method you will find there are three kinds of Sky Light Precision the higher the value the better effect we will get But if you input higher value the system will be slow because InteriCAD is occupying more and more computer resource when rendering Note when using this method to calculate radiosity you must remove the activate status of Calculate sunlight through Otherwise you cannot see the effect In some cases to cancel radiosity calculation is to return to the status before using radiosity from the status after using that For example you may do this when you find that the orientation of some face is not right When this happens you have to return to the status before using radiosity to adjust the surface Do as follows O From the Render menu select Reset Radiosity e in the popup dialogue box single click Y Before radiosity calculation you should set the subdivide length and epsilon The radiosity calculation dialogue box provides an integral setting But it is not enough E g the ceiling board lighted by the light trap should represent homogeneous graduation effect light But neither normal nor high precision subdivide length can fulfill this requirement So you can set 374
253. ou can observe that the red axis should determine the projection direction of texture mapping In addition the origin of UCS corresponds to the left lower corner point 342 InteriCAD T5 User Manual The green axis X axis of UCS is consistent with the horizontal direction of texture mapping while the blue axis Y axis is consistent with the vertical direction The relation between auto texture mapping and UCS is similar to that of plan texture coordinate Relation between cylinder texture mapping coordinate and UCS The origin of UCS is at the center axis of cylinder texture mapping and the red axis is Superposed with the center axis The second view shown as fellows has produced serious distortion of entire texture map because the origin of UCS is not close to the center of that cylinder 343 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Relation between sphere texture mapping coordinate and UCS The origin of UCS is that of sphere texture mapping coordinate 9 8 6 Random Material In order to let designers devote more time on creation rather than making InteriCAD VR provides an excellent tool Intelligent Match color which has the following capabilities 1 Itcan call existing match color plan for interior ceiling floor and walls 2 ltcan gradually change color and automatically replace texture mapping for single object 3 User can random add and edit match color library using the developed database Operation 1 Automat
254. ouble click any cell of working area you can edit the content of the cell And its corresponding property will change 266 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 5 3 11 Right Click Menu And you can see there is a right click menu appears when you right click on any directory 9 5 3 12 Right Click on the Root system_library ERGO Hew Group Sort Rename New Group Create new subdirectory in this directory Sort Show the group that under this directory Suet Tree Wo GrouplD Name sort Index OK l home_furniture ae 6 kitchen_items 8 Sanitary ware 4 plant 10 household elec 11 interior_decor 14 office furniti 1 2 3 4 5 6 T E 16 structure DO classic furnit 141 lamp_appliance J8 Electric_fitti 164 addL1b1 27762 cthers E Soyo E a a G aa A G a G G ua G G a G a a aa G A aa G E aa a E aa A A n Group ID is ID of this group in the mdb file Name is the name of the group that shows on the catalog tree Sort Index is the order of the group that shows on the catalog tree while 0 means the first Rename User can edit the name of the directory by this function 267 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 5 3 13 Right Click on Subdirectory Becti S E addLit Hew Group 9 dassie ona home i a Misa Copy to E Ea Mowe to EJ kithe Wy lamp office Delete A others Compared to the right click menu of root directory there are 3 more
255. ovides you the most convenient operation modes and abundant design resources and thus makes it handier to do your job The worktable interface is shown as the following image It integrates two functions Query Tiles and Tiles Quotation Si InteriC AD T5 User Manual Product search Usage statistics Size 400 400 53 Type lt Not specify gt y Color lt Not specify gt hd Grade lt Not specify gt Click the button to search tiles The Query Tiles section is divided into two parts One is operating area another is display area At the top of display area there is current page number and page switch button At the bottom of display area there is total page number and total tile number Activate Worktable Basic operations 1 Choose corresponding command from Pave menu 2 Press Spacebar Display setting of Worktable Display Setting Icon Space Horz X 10 Vert 32 Hight co 32 InteriCAD T5 User Manual At the top of display area there s Detail and Setting button The former is used to view the detail of selected tile and the later is to configure the display setting To view the detail of a tile left click on it And then click Detail button to display the dialog box To configure the display setting click Setting button to display the dialog box It s only used to change the display area Click OK button to apply the modification and quit 3 4 2 Query Tiles In t
256. ow style Shown as below m Design door and window A Door and window User defined window Parameterized window Bay window Parameter idth 1650 evation 1000 Dutside frame idth 50 Thickness 5 Inside frame fidth 30 Thickness Offset Offset 2 Sketch map Window style Delete elevation baseline Pick lt lect window style Pick up the Select window Parameter setting window shape shape from library Yes Cancel 5 Once setting is finished click Yes Select the wall for locating the window 4 6 3 Parameterized Window 1 Select Door Window menu and then Parameterized Window 2 Select Window design and define Parameter 107 InteriCAD T5 User Manual m Design door and window 3 Door and window User defined window Parameterized window Bay window Frame section fidth 50 hickness 50 etails Window design Window shape Parameter ser vertical jamb er vertical jamb rontal jamb height Preferences Width 1200 rontal jamb height Y Is it necessa idth Height 1200 Offset evation 1000 Iffset O lt Size of whole window Detailed parameter of window Pick up the size of window from current drawing Yes Cancel 3 Once setting is finished click Yes Select the wall for locating the window 4 6 4 The Cover of the Doors and Windows The system provides various styles of the door and windows and editing function User can const
257. p format picture as the background Mirror Background Mode This mode is used in exterior design 1 Sky This is the default setting of the background while doing the exterior design All the windows or glass will appear to be blue while looking from outside 2 Brightness You can change reflective color of the windows or glass as well as the brightness in this mode Background Option ee e Background Mode fe Sky C Color C Texture Mirror Background Mode e Sky Brightness la o canen 9 11 7 Light Adjustment From the Render menu single click Light adjustment or click 5 button The following dialogue box will appear before using radiosity and you can 380 InteriCAD T5 User Manual adjust the brightness of the whole scene Brightness 1 200000 caren The following dialogue box will appear after radiosity The effect previewed in this dialogue box is completely the same as that of after using raytrace and the preview effect will change with the ome adjustment immediately Engan Contrast Black Basic Operations white Auto ox Cancel 1 Drag the Brightness slider to adjust the brightness of the whole scene and the preview picture will change without delay The usage is visual 2 Drag the Exposure slider to adjust the exposure of the whole scene 3 Drag the Contrast slider to adjust the contrast of the whole scene 4 Drag Black and White sliders to adjust image leve
258. points 9 7 10 Distance from Object to Wall Select Distance from Object to Wall trom Object According the prompt in the command window select the object needed to be queried The distance from the object to wall will be displayed in blue Select another object needed to be queried right click to finish 9 7 11 Distance between Object Select Distance between Object from Object Select the based object according the prompt in the command window Select another object and the distance between the based object and the second object will be displayed in blue Select the third object and the distance between the based object and the third object will be displayed in blue Right click to finish 9 7 12 Nearest Distance Select Nearest Distance from Object Select the object needed to be queried according the prompt in the command window Select another object needed to be queried right click to finish 9 7 13 Accurate Edit Select Accurate Edit from Object a dialogue box will appear as shown on the right The default operation is Move Click the object you want to edit Take the double seat sofa below as an example we can see the sofa displayed in green wireframe is selected and three axes are in green blue and red Move X G InteriCAD T5 User Manual A Z R Rotate Angle gt Size X G Y B Z R Now input value in the edit panel the object will move accurately For
259. r Manual VWoodikanel Board Thickness 20 Miter Angle 3 Select the boundaries These boundaries will define one or more closed areas 4 Click in an area to confirm the closed area selected 4 7 3 2 Terra Nova Wall Plaster 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Terra Nova Wall Plaster 2 Inthe Plaster Strips dialog box input all required parameters and press OK 120 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Ella vovdbyvallblaster ype 9 Default User Define Spacing ranca The type of stripe models can be user defined Do as the followings 1 Select the curve to define the type of stripe model 2 Select the base point of stripe model 3 Select the boundaries These boundaries will define one or more closed areas 4 Click in an area to confirm the closed area selected 5 Select the projection point of the finishing 4 7 3 3 Leather Facing 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Leather Facing 2 Inthe Leather Facing dialog box input all required parameters and press 121 InteriCAD T5 User Manual OK Mestnentracina Number Of Rows Number of Columns 5 E 3 Select the boundaries These boundaries will define one or more closed areas 4 Click in an area to confirm the selected area 5 Select the projection point of the finishing 4 7 3 4 Bamboo Facing 1 From Elevation menu select Decoration then Bamboo Facing 2 In the Bamboo Facing dialog box input
260. r color texture mapping to Wrap model is coordinate InteriCAD VR provides totally four types of texture mapping coordinate Auto Map According to each surface s direction of object 340 InteriCAD T5 User Manual automatically align every surface to project Also you can control the size of image Plan Map Project an image to object s surface with the mode of projector But you can only project to one surface and images not in this surface will be distorted Also you can control the size of image on the surface and the start position of image Usually it is used in such objects as floor wall ceiling which have only one surface Cylinder Map It is used to project an image to a cylinder object and the cylinder surface will be wrapped by this image except top surface and bottom surface You also can control the size of image Sphere Map It is used to project an image to a sphere Note that the concept of texture mapping coordinate is pertinent to the color texture mapping material and it is meaningless to adjust texture mapping coordinate for some material without color texture mapping Basic operations 1 How to set auto texture mapping coordinate e From the Material menu select Resetmap then Auto Map e Left click relevant surface and right click Note this operation will automatically clear out existing texture mapping coordinate setting on the selected surface The default size of auto texture
261. ransparency must not be 0 otherwise it has no effect 3 Click the Texture button of transparency texture map InteriCAD T5 User Manual Base Color Reflection Transparency Stencil Bun 4 gt Transparency loco J Refraction 1 00 Texture None Inverse 4 Select the required black and white picture by browsing Function of Inversion the system makes an inversion process of gray level Stencil texture map Stencil texture mapping is similar to reflection texture mapping You need a color texture picture and its according black amp white picture For black amp white picture it is also a kind of black and white picture which Supporting formats include JPG BMP and TIF It requires the black part of the picture be pure black while the white part is pure white lt can use the black and white pattern to control whether the object surface will be displayed or not The black part will be displayed normally while the white part will disappear completely Usually you can combine texture mapping with color and stencil texture mapping to process some complex models for example plant handrail and human etc Now we will make a plant in the following Basic operations Open the Material Editor Switch to Color label Click the Texture button of color texture mapping Select the required normal plant pattern file by browsing Switch to Stencil label Click the big button of stencil texture map ADN Color
262. rding to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style E InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 4 5 6 Odd Even Tiling Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Odd even tiling in shortcut menu Move the mouse and the system will show the tiling dynamically by a square box with the same size to that ceramic The ceramics will be tiled along the two sides of the selected one by the ceramic size The tiling mode is to odd even tile the ceramics in the rectangle stretched by the mouse and the system will automatically work out the ceramic quantity required Press the F key then the system will tile the whole region in current tiling mode A Drag mode B Select mode Left click in an appropriate position and then the tiles will be tiled according to the dragging status before final selecting New tiles will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style 3 4 5 7 Continuously Oblique Tiling Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Continuously oblique tiling in shortcut menu 59 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Move the mouse and the system will show the tiling dynamically by a square box with the same size to that ceramic The ceramics will be tiled along the two sides o
263. rsion Generate ceiling If you don t have a ceiling in the room you can check this box Use furniture in template can add in the furniture you see in this template review Add adorn can add in the adorn you see in this template review 3 The current 2D drawing will convert to 3D in Virtual Reality once you press OK The room style will be similar with the template chosen In Virtual Reality open a saved std file To open 2D file in Virtual Reality A Open Virtual Reality Select Import 2D file B Inthe pop up dialogue box select the koc file 42 InteriCAD T5 User Manual G Select std file to import Look in do test e Ed Name Date modified Ty Ejoo1 9 17 2010 2 14 PM YI 4 rr j Files of type Ceramic file koc v Cancel Next the same as the operation process of Export to VR Chapter 3 Ceramic Module 3 1 Ceramic Module Startup Ceramic Module in 2D Design You should startup 2D Design first using any of the following methods 1 Double click the 2D Design shortcut on the WINDOWS desktop 2 Select Program from Start menu and then YFCAD Software InteriCAD T5 2D Design 3 Then run the command Ceramic Module in Render You should startup Render first using any of the following methods 1 Double click the Render shortcut on the WINDOWS desktop 2 Select Program from Start menu and then YFCAD Software InteriCAD T5 Render 43 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 3 Then run the command
264. rt MTF files in VR 1 Enter InteriCAD VR from main interface 2 From the File menu select Import 3DMax Model command the system will ask you to clear the current scene click OK to continue And then select a MTF file in the pop up dialogue box 3 Left click Open button the model will appear in the perspective workplace of InteriCAD VR 9 3 7 Merge 3dMax Model Click File gt Merge from 3DMax in menu bar Select a MTF file in the pop up dialogue box Left click Open button the model will appear in the perspective workplace of InteriCAD VR 9 3 8 Import 3ds Sketchup Model eo Prepare mtf 3ds or skp files e Enter InteriCAD VR from main interface InteriCAD T5 User Manual e From the File menu select Import 3ds Skethchup e An Import MTF 3DS SKP dialog will be pop up Select the file needed to be imported Set the Unit Option and Merge Option and choose an insert point If you want to explode tick the Explode selection Click OK to finish 9 3 9 Import 2D File e From File menu click Import 2D File e Select koc file in the appeared dialogue box e The system will pop up the dialogue box of selecting template The preview picture of the template is on the right side of the dialogue box You can select a template according to your need and then press OK button bedroom07 bedroom08 bedroom09 Fa i V Generate ceiling lamp I Use fumiture in template V Add adom C The system will r
265. ruct a door and windows frame with various section styles Basic operations 1 Select Door Window Cover from the Door Window 2 Select the frames that will be generated 108 InteriCAD T5 User Manual oF Select the style of the section line from the Frame dialogue box and input the dimensions of the frame re A Door Win Cover Section line 1 Line N1 Hee 30 Section line 2 Notice N is the thick of the vall Line X Cancel User can select different frame forms and styles provided by the system library or customize them e Draw the modeling segment of the inner and outer section line of the door and windows frame using polyline in the plane view You don t need to draw the actual dimension But the direction of the Y axis coordinate of the start and endpoint should be the same e Select customize and the pre draw modeling segment in the plane view The system will adjust it to proper dimension automatically 5 Select OK and the frame will be generated automatically 4 6 4 1 Update 109 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Similar to the function of updating wall door update will fix the display error after some editing works on the doors and windows Operations Press Door Window menu gt Update 4 6 4 2 Modify Open Direction You can change the open direction of a door or window with this function Basic operations Press Door Window gt Modify Open Direction then th
266. s Click the SW Perspective button The system will automatically switch to SW Perspective Click the NW Perspective button The system will automatically switch to NW Perspective Click the NE Perspective button The system will automatically switch to NE Perspective Click the SE Perspective button The system will automatically switch to SE Perspective 9 4 3 Walk Mode System defaults to activate Walk Mode button e 248 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Move Forward press left button to drag from upward to downward Move Backward press the left button to drag from downward to upward Move left press the left button to drag from left to right Move Right press the right button to drag from the right to left Note if the data amount of the scene is huge or your display adaptor doesn t support OPENGL you may not move smoothly using the default texture map color mode In this case you can switch to wireframe mode 9 4 4 Elevate Single Click Elevate to activate it Rise Up press the left button to drag from upward to downward Lower Down press the left button to drag from downward to upward Lift Off press the left button to drag from upward to downward Descend press the left button to drag from the downward to upward 9 4 5 Spin Single Click Spin to activate it Rotate Clockwise press the left button to drag from left to right Rotate counter clockwise press the left button to drag from right to left 9 4 6 Pan
267. s No Filling Color BYLAYER Hide No Display 3D At Doors and Windows Open up 8 3 3 Attribute Edit amp Common Operation There are three types of attribute edit including edit copy and extract 1 Edit edit is used to modify certain attribute of the object The operational procedure is indicated as follow 1 Choose the right attribute you want from the Attribute in the Edit 190 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Attribute Left click the Edit button Input the new value Different types of attribute can have different types of attribute value The data type of the new value must match the type of the original one For an attribute value like Switch nothing will happen after you left click the Edit The graph will be changed only after the dialog box has been shut down After input the value back to Edit Attribute and click OK to finish the operation Copy choose one or more different attributes and apply them to the object of the same type In this way they can be provided with same attribute values of the original one The operational procedure is as follow Choose one or more available attributes from the Attribute in the Edit Attribute Remember the Copy button in the dialog box must be available Left click the Copy button Choose the one or more objects of the same type from the interface after the dialog box is hidden Back to the Edit Attribute and click OK to finish the operation Extract ex
268. s 111 4 6 6 Add the Door and Windows into the Library oooooooonnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnonononononnncnnnnnos 113 47 Elsvation Decorado a or od eri 114 SET Elevation aa 114 SETZ INICHE Oia ss 116 SEO DECO ra O coi a a si 119 STR PERG tink ater oi cs atid ace raat ance E A A EA A O T A OT 126 SAT Curve Wall Decoration A a a A a a A A a a a d 127 84 730 Move E a EE ed dis del tes da do ea 128 4 7 7 Display Control of Elevation Objects 00000onneeeernesesssssssssrsseereessssssssersseeeereeesssssses 129 O45 Colima Dodd neral dae ee odia 129 84 6 1 B ildthe Colino Board oia 129 84 62 Atraco he Recess Down dolia 137 4 8 3 Display Control of the Objects on the Ceiling Board oooonnnnncccncccncncnnnnononnnncnnnonnnnnos 143 A e Cabeeeenhanes a a oe ebae 144 S49 1 Conste FOO ssh A cals E A do os 144 64072 Foor A O O A ed 144 SAO CUE IDA 145 SAO Move on EEN cisnes 147 4 9 5 Display Control of the Floor ObjectS oooccccccccoonooonooonnnnncccnnnnnnonononnnnnonanonancnnnnnos 147 Chapter SD Modest iia 148 85 1 Modelme Function Based On LIT aid ds 148 Si Hond alean quoteagtuaamecccnemieaaaasetenes 148 Lp e A A ROSIE SPREE SAO NEL E RRA AE ATER ONE PRA REET ROSE TEL REET 149 59 Pie O Ec a nats rere arte tte oore en er eee eer Ar eo TORT ren rere ee ree 150 S92 Modeline Alons the Palla SAD AA AAA ARENAS 151 A SA RR RO RO 151 S331 Text Alons PAN a ino 152 SI Transtorm 2 EOS coros 152 A RO 153 A
269. s Reserved InteriCAD T5 includes three components which are Modeling 2D Design Render InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 2 1 2D Design Interface e Menu Bar Where software commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button e Tool Bar Where most common commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button eo Workplace The specific area to construct drawing Spire IntericADi gt Fi le Edit View Draw Room Structure Ceiling Region Pave Enter3D Setting Help IIQ fe al ls e aa la fe 8 8 A ie a k nl le je B B B e o Insert Image Build Room Column Door Window Zoom Extend Zoom Window Snap Snap Setting Line Arc Circle Ellipse Pline Text Dimension Create All Floor Pave Door Region Query Tiles Tiles Quotation Update VR Print Zoom all A EY Y Snap atlength Y Snap at angle V Snap atnode Snap at grid vr 1 2 2 Introduction to Yuan Fang VR Interface Menu Bar Where software commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button e Tool Bar Where most common commands are placed you can use them by clicking the left mouse button eo Workplace The specific area to construct drawing e Command Window Where you can input commands InteriCAD T5 User Manual Status Bar Displa Cursor coordinate Us mode status E SNR E OLOJO Demool Ke EXperlencese DROS DAVR SAAV allldEcoration File
270. s in the VR part the arrow appointed area is the command For VR please refer to the Virtual Reality chapter for more information 3 3 Paving Region Tiles can only be paved in the paving region Tiles beyond the regional boundary will be cut automatically 3 3 1 Rectangular Region Basic Operations 1 Region gt Rectangular Region 45 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Dimension Length poo Cance 2 Input region size and then click OK button 3 Left click to define the location of this region then the region is generated 3 3 2 Draw Region Basic operations 1 Region gt Draw Region 2 Move the cursor to workspace Click one point when program prompts First point 3 When program prompts Next point move the cursor to another position and left click to define the second point To keep the region closed program will connect the starting point and cursor automatically from the third point 4 When the last point is defined right click to end this command Program will generate a region according to these points 3 3 3 Door Region Basic operations 1 Region gt Door Region 2 The cursor is replaced by a small red box Click on the door to generate region The selected door will be highlighted 3 Right click to end the selection and then a dialog box pops up 46 InteriCAD T5 User Manual E Create tiling area under door SS e Set an entire tiling area under the door This area i
271. s provided by the system from Continuously straight tiling to Offset tiling all can be substituted by Free tiling except that its operation may be more complicated The Free tiling function is the most essential in this ceramic design module The following description will lay a strong emphasis on this function to have you understand its essence Basic operations 1 Right click on target tile and then choose Free tiling in shortcut menu 2 The Free Tiling Settings dialog box displays 62 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Free tiling setting Not specified Tiling direction 2 D2 Not specified Subsidiary ceramic 0 block slices Here we preliminarily know that there are three parameters to be set in Free tiling that is two directions and additional slices Look at the following image We might as well call the ceramic slice with two derivative directions as the main slice It is not difficult to find that the main slice and the Additional slices specified in the image is a combination unit in the above tile plan image while the Direction 1 and Direction 2 point at the other two main slices are not in the same direction 3 Click Tiling direction 1 button and select the main slice for the neighboring unit set 4 Click Tiling direction 2 button and select the main slice for the other neighboring unit set You should make sure that the selected direction is not in a line with direction 1 We should understand the select
272. s smaller than the light energy limit parameter No matter how many times it calculates the patch surface will not be subdivided The value of epsilon supports scientific notation for instance 1e 006 is 0 000001 Under the same lighting condition the smaller the value is the smaller the area of the subdivision surface is The second parameter is subdividing length This parameter controls the size of the minimum subdivision surface Without this parameter the surface that is very near to the light source will be subdivided endlessly which can cause the system out of resource Furthermore if the scene is very big such as a scene of 1000 square meters a higher subdivide length should be used to raise working efficiency In addition during radiosity calculation different epsilon and subdivide length can be applied to the direct surface illuminated by the light source and the indirect surface illuminated by the second reflection light As the light energy is 372 InteriCAD T5 User Manual abundant for the surface that illuminated by the light source the effect may be good using high precision and small subdivide length as the light energy is relatively small for the second reflection light using lower precision and higher subdivide lengthen will improve the radiosity calculation efficiency The third parameter is diffuse factor This factor has great affect on the radiosity calculation result Take a scene with many light sources and many
273. s the same size with door bottom face Generate double area Set two equal tiling area under the door Each area is the half size of door bottom face 4 Choose either option from the dialog box You can check the difference between two options in the schematic diagram 5 Click OK button to generate door region region 3 3 4 Search Region acts Copy Change color 1 Region gt Search Region Floor elevation 2 The cursor is replaced by a small red box and program i a Change name prompts Select one point inside the region to be Chango alce cae searched Left click in an enclosed area that is dean slice Surrounded by lines or walls Combine regions Region subtract 3 Program will search out the area boundary and generate regon intersect paving region Delete 3 3 5 Modify Paving Region The properties of paving region such as color name and slice gap are editable Boolean operations are also available for regions Right click on a 47 InteriCAD T5 User Manual region to display the shortcut menu All relevant edit functions can be found in this shortcut menu 3 3 5 1 Change Color Basic operations 1 Right click on a region to display the shortcut menu and then choose Change color command in it 2 Choose a color in the pop up standard color dialog box Click OK button the region color has been changed 3 3 5 2 Change Name Basic operations 1 Right click on a region to display the shortcut
274. se existing plan in the Tile Plan library to directly layout ceramic slices on a wall surface in Render module Basic operations select the Apply Tiling Plan command from the Tiling menu It pops up the Tile Plan dialog box Select a plan in it 351 InteriCAD T5 User Manual A Double click on an item and left click to select a surface And then system will apply selected plan to that surface 352 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 9 4 Replace Tile Change existing ceramic slices to selected library item Basic operations Select the Replace Tile command from the Tiling menu Left click on a ceramic slice to be replaced It pops up the Select ceramic dialog box Select ceramic Code FO Page ES amp Manu 31 E Size bo aso EJ Type lt Not Specify gt al Color lt Not Specify gt al Class lt Not Specify gt Double click on an item or left click on it and click OK button It pops up a dialog box you can choose whether to replace all the same ceramic slices on the surface or only the selected ceramic slice Select an option and click OK button System will replace the ceramic slice with selected library item 9 9 5 Split Surface Split a surface in Render module Basic operations 353 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Select the Split Surface from Tiling Split surface xj Select Surface AO e By Region C By Height C ByLine By Region A R
275. sed plane curve and cannot intersect with itself Basic operations 131 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 Select Ceiling from the Ceiling menu and then Create Hole on Ceiling 2 Select the ceiling board base surface that will be cut 3 Select the definition curve of the shape of the entrance hole The position of the entrance hole is the projection position of entrance hole s contour line on the ceiling board Air Ventilation Grille on the Ceiling Board The shape of the air ventilation is square so the entrance hole of the air ventilation should also be square Basic operations 1 Select Ceiling from the Ceiling menu and then Intake 2 Select the base surface of the ceiling board on which the air ventilation will be made 3 Select the contour line of the air ventilation s entrance hole 4 8 1 2 Wood Ceiling The system provides various wood strip designs for the ceiling board Basic operations 1 Select Wood Ceiling from the ceiling menu 2 Select the combination type of the ceiling board in the Wood Strip dialogue box and input corresponding data Press OK 132 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Type A A B C D E F G H o Board Width 90 mm Board Thickness 15 mm Gap Space 10 mm mm Angle 0 Cancel 3 Select the boundary which may include several closed areas 4 Select a point to determine the projection area of the ceiling board 5 Assign a point to define the patt
276. sing polyline on the surface of the coffered ceiling 2 Select Trim Ceiling from Ceiling menu 3 Select the coffered ceiling and then the shape to trim 4 8 1 5 Hole The function is used for creating a hole on the ceiling Basic operations 1 Draw any shape using polyline on the surface of the ceiling 135 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 Select the ceiling and then select the shape to create the hole on the ceiling 4 8 1 6 Ceiling Cornice To create a ceiling cornice you need to have a closed room or a closed polyline Basic operations 1 Select Ceiling Cornice from Ceiling menu 2 Click inside the room and system will automatically generate a ceiling cornice IVICIOING Rata merer Thickness T e ceiling mm Height H 5 Elevation of top Auto search baseline C Select baseline Section oe gt canes 3 You can draw a base shape first using polyline and then use Select baseline to generate 4 To customize the section of the ceiling cornice you need to create an unclosed polyline first and make sure the start point and end point of the polyine should have the same X coordinate Next select Custom from the 136 InteriCAD T5 User Manual drag box and select the unclosed polyline accordingly 4 8 2 Arrange the Recess Down Light Arranging the recess down light on the ceiling board has the functionalities of both lighting and decoration The system provides three methods t
277. so be selected Hold the Shift key to select all the records in between two clicks Select all the records by the shortcut key Ctrl A Delete record Cursor status Edit status the status when the cursor is in a certain property for editing usually when you add or modify the ceramic records 79 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Selection status the status when you can press the DOWN or UP key to move the blue bar to select a record 1 Select the record to be deleted and then press the Delete button 2 Select the record to be deleted When the cursor is in the selection status press the function key Delete 3 Select the record to be deleted When the cursor is in the edit status press the shortcut key Ctrl Delete 3 9 5 Query Ceramic Record 1 Press the Query button or press the function key F3 and it pops up the Query dialogue box 2 Specify the query conditions 3 Press the Query button and then all the qualified records will be listed in the data window 4 After query press the Close button to exit the dialogue box 3 9 6 Set Display Status of Ceramic Properties If there are many ceramic properties and they cannot be displayed in one screen it is necessary to set the ceramic display status so that you can hide the unnecessary properties to simplify your operations You can change the order of the property items by dragging and placing However the user cannot change the display status or the order of
278. splay of workplace the software will refresh the active window to assure the accuracy of display If we operate in a huge or complicated scene refresh rate will drop dramatically Although we can change to wireframe mode to optimize speed it will bring troubles for our operation The software has provided functions to solve this problem e Replace Blocks by Cuboid Replace all blocks in scene with cuboids decrease the number of patches to increase refresh rate The cuboid s size is equal to the block s maximum extension only effective to mm objects e Replace Selected by Cuboid Replace selected object with cuboid decrease the number of patches to increase refresh rate The cuboid s size is equal to the block s maximum extension only effective to mm objects e Return to Block Return Cuboid to Block Note Remember to return cuboid to block before radiosity or radiosity will be calculated according to cuboids and you cant return to block after radiosity InteriCAD VR also provides the command that can detach coplane surface and patch The function of the two commands is to appoint the material conveniently For example you can appoint different materials to the six surfaces of a wall 408 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 13 5 Surface Radiosity Setting e Select Surface Radiosity Setting from Optimize menu e Left click the surface that will be adjusted with pressing Shift for multiple selection e Right click then the Surface opt
279. t lt Save Cancel For frame and sill setting of wall hole please refer to the similar settings of the single door Ground Material You can define material for the ground as well as setting its size Ground setting a re Create template Door ground Wall hole 3 Wall hole frame Wall hole sill Map Length 500 Map Width 500 Ground Ground stage TETTETETT Ceiling d Ceiling cornice a Chair rail Skirting Base board 4 dii r Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Ground stage Material You can define material for the ground stage second third as well as setting its size 230 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Border Material You can define material for the boarder Create template Peeters Door ground a aun a Wall hole a mi Wall hole frame Wall hole sill Map Length 500 Map Width 500 Ground Ground stage Ceiling i Ceiling cornice Chair rail Skirting i Base board Lamp 4 TT Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Border Material mi 1 Ceiling You can define the ceiling type as well as its material Note This function will be activated when there is no ceiling in 2d The ceiling block will generate according to the position of sofa table and TV cabinet There won t be ceiling block generated if system can not find the furniture Create template i
280. t panel right panel and back panel optional in order and then press Enter or right click to end the selection 3 The system will pop up a dialogue box in which you can set the shape of the panel and other parameters Input the information and click OK to create the panel InteriCAD T5 User Manual Shelves Panel Thickness 25 Indent to left panel 0 Left right Clear o Elevation f Distance to the bottom of left panel f Distance to the top of left panel 600 Cancel 4 Left click to set the base point of the panel the panel will be created 9 6 13 Dividing Panel This command enables you to generate a vertical panel between two horizontal panels Basic operations 1 Select Kitchen Design gt Dividing Panel 2 According to the prompt of system command line select the left panel right panel and back panel optional in order and then right click or press Enter 3 The system will pop up a dialogue box in which you can the panel parameters Input the information and click OK to create the panel 9 6 14 Parameter Settings Select Kitchen Design gt Parameter Settings Tab Handle For changing the handles 302 InteriCAD T5 User Manual System parameters setting profile 01 New Delete Rename Copy Handle Worktop Lines Others Handle for rotary door Location Y Horizontal 7 Level Center e z Offset distance Level 36 Upright 36 E Handle for up open door V Instal
281. t s nodes All blue points in the following figure are object s nodes The function is very useful in auto drawing for example drawing a line that connects to another endpoint line with an arc endpoint Basic operations If there is a mark near the Snap at Node Snap command in the right corner it indicates that the function is on or otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF status of the Node function by checking or unchecking it Length Snap Function lt is an auxiliary drawing tool used to control the step value of the 37 InteriCAD T5 User Manual mouse when Draw a line command is on The function is similar to the Grid command but the Length is calculated from an existing specified point For example when drawing a line or wall the length snap is calculated from the first point while grid is determined according to the current coordinate in the workspace The default is 100mm Basic operations lf there is a mark near the Snap at Length command in the right corner it indicates that the function is on otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF status of the Length function by checking or unchecking it Angle Snap Function It is an auxiliary drawing tool lt is use to control the step angle for rotating the line rather than to rotate with any angle when Draw a line command is use The default value is 15 degree Basic operations lf there is a mark near the Snap at Angle Snap command in the right corner it i
282. t these operations to complete the process as shown below Select Handrail baseline from the Combine Stairs menu select the Staircase and flat platform that need handrail press Enter and the handrail baseline has been made The staircase and flat platform have been hidden for convenient viewing InteriCAD T5 User Manual Select a rail style from the library then select the rail line a handrail will be made Shown as below 5 4 2 Staircase Base on Two Lines Generate the staircase by two curves on the plane This function can be used to generate staircases with different special effect on two sides Basic Operations 1 Select Create Stair by 2 lines from 3D Model menu 2 Select two boundaries of the staircase The selected boundaries should be closed to the starting point of the staircase When selecting the border line please select the end near the starting point of the stair Input the total height of the staircase 157 InteriCAD T5 User Manual reatestanmbriacuble line Side width Offset handrail baseline al Handrail EA 3aseline Offset Cancel 3 Input the riser height height of the step 4 Input the side width width of the platform surface of both sides The platform surface can be divided into 3 parts while every part can be assigned with different materials such as carpet laying effect 5 Input offset value of handrail baseline Two 3D polylines have been generated whe
283. tabase ooooooooononcccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 79 3 9 4 Delete Ceramic Record from Database ooccoccnnccnnccnnccnoconoconoconoconioconoconoconoconacnnicnnss 79 Si Query Ceramic RECO sad a Ud iS DA ai do 80 3 9 6 Set Display Status of Ceramic Properties occcccccccnnnnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononananonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 80 83 9 7 Sortand Column Replace a la 81 Chapter asic SUCHTE nando 82 SJ Modelme Intertace cial iii 82 BaD A O clean a a 83 SAEZ ROTA KIS sss Sood A N S VENAE AR 83 SA OO A A teo 86 84233 Display Controlof Gid MARS a e a 88 SAD Wall erea RE ER 88 A Bao 89 D2 WEG 233 235 gues a utseduisnna A AN 91 S44 Perimeter amp KIO ai AA A AA 99 AA is eana actioned ataeeed dackuven a 100 OD SIPC asec haw O A EE ci Cosa e be N OE NO A 100 aes mae O LS 101 BAY Square Column OA Sd ASA AD AA AAA A GRA 101 4 3 2 Round Column On AXIS j vscsesssscsesaies oticeiss nnana an aa a aai 102 845 3 Freestanding Square COMM cesses utwccuesseide caved doi 103 do Fr estandin Round Commi a is 103 Sos Delete COM ac ceases cosa nies Se ee sss etal ee ida lila 104 S246 Doorsand WINGO WS ai a da ia ene 104 S476 Insert Doors aiid W MdOwWS E iia 104 4 6 2 User Define WINDOW ii 106 1v InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 6 3 Parameterized O ds 107 4 6 4 The Cover of the Doors and WiNdOWS occcoccnnccnoccnoconoconoconoconccnnccnoronaronaroniconioconicons 108 846 5 Edit the Doo and Windows d
284. te will be built based on this surface using the green axis as the X axis and the red axis as the Z axis UCS User Coordinate System Rotate X Axis 250 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Rotate the UCS around X axis green axis Basic operations 1 Select UCS gt UCS On in the View menu to turn on UCS 2 Select UCS gt Rotate X Axis in the View menu 3 Move cursor to rotate x axis left click to confirm and right click to cancel Rotate Y Axis Rotate the UCS around Y axis blue axis Basic operations 1 Select UCS gt UCS On in the View menu to turn on UCS 2 Select UCS gt Hotate Y Axis in the View menu 3 Move cursor to rotate y axis left click to confirm and right click to cancel Rotate Z Axis Rotate the UCS around Z axis red axis Basic operations 1 Select UCS gt UCS On in the View menu to turn on UCS 2 Select UCS gt Hotate Z Axis in the View menu 3 Move cursor to rotate z axis left click to confirm and right click to cancel Move UCS Rotate the UCS on the XY plane Basic operations 1 Select UCS gt UCS On in the View menu to turn on UCS 2 Select UCS gt Move UCS in the View menu 3 Move cursor to move UCS left click to confirm and right click to cancel UCS On Display the current space coordinate system and a blue grid will be generated on the XY plane 251 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations Select UCSDUCS On in the View menu UCS Off Hide the current space coordinate system Basi
285. ter Select whether to keep line base Input Y for yes otherwise input N command window Select whether some wall bodies will be displaced relative to the line base If no wall to be placed click the right button to end If one axis has been chosen system will ask you to enter the displacement Click the left button to identify the location System will correct the axis according to the displacement Shown as the following several parts of wall bodies have been built by InteriCAD T5 User Manual using straight and curve wall lt gt 4 3 1 4 Build Room For improving design system provides the function of building rooms You only need to define the base point length and width of the room and a rectangular room with walls on four sides will be setup Basic operations 1 Select Build room from Structure menu 2 Choose the left lower corner of the room 3 Specify the length of the room The distance of X direction 4 Specify the width of the room The distance of Y direction 5 Input the rotation angle of the room relative to the forward direction of X axis which use Counter clockwise direction as the forward direction Click right button or press Enter directly means that zero degree angles has been input 4 3 2 Wall Editing The wall editing mentioned here is different from the wall attributes editing Attribute editing is mainly to modify the parameters of the wall such as height thickness start
286. terface and Command Function ccocccnccnnccnoconoconoconioconoconacnnocnnccnaroniconocos 202 RO 215 SL OPM aos iodo 215 A edo ib es 215 BD a A Er A tele nat E E E ES 216 Sak IMPOR ON Mode IMG ea i rsaateesgnn sisal esau ai renatatevare erie seamoeerueneas 216 BOS Meroe trom MOE MING td SADA AAA GA 216 09 9 0 porn 3 Max Mode restan ar o a 217 S937 Merse 3dMax Mod nos 218 87 30 mpor ds ketchup Modelado 218 SI pot 2D E aiii cis 219 SO Template Scirocco its 220 ASA Y A RR 237 999 NZ SIO Pe Ce 11 e CO PEE E O 238 Vill InteriCAD T5 User Manual 7 GID CUS E tess se hecitant E A E T teas bance dee gushes E N E E T 245 693 14 Toolbar Man AS A Ad eed ios 246 O a da a es 246 OO VIEW ASAS AAA AS 247 Sl DIAM a dea 247 OOD OA 247 A HOGG cist e N TS 248 SOM hone tada area 249 OO AO A O 249 A A A A A A 249 SA A E O etal ee cede sbi aha II AS 249 SOAS ZOOM Md RD A 250 OAD O RO 250 A E ON 252 BOAT ShOW Camera Lis AAA E lab A G 254 SOD Products Libraries 254 OO Dell SNOW LIDA ae gue emus 254 O Ae Ta ys Coad eto hace A hace Gatenettted hohe dwacads 256 o Ber A ea re bx cn epee meet ee eR ETEA A Pr E A oveN MTT ya E E ee entree sere Mr EET 256 Ss o RUO E E NE TEE TETEE OR EE EE AERE 270 e PEN R Dl keneen O E E 271 IO ERDO SWT ICE e e N daa 271 BO De EPO OD CC aiee aeea NENE E E NEN NE N S 212 S900 REEN VAR BOCK ase recs ia OAN 273 SU EXPO Whole Oceanic 273 SINO Create ENU Yaaron e AAA A AAA A AA AAA A 273 BO oI Explod
287. terial for the base board Shape You can define the section shape of the base board Create template Ba se board setting Bay window Default H GridDoor V Generate V User Define Wall hole Ground Height 120 Ceiling Ceiling cornice Map Length 240 Chair rail 5 Skirting Thickness ho Base board Material oOo iY El Lamp User defined rule Shape Specify furniture y Open Pick up lt lt Save Cancel Lamp Default System will generate lamps while activating this option Living room System will generate pendant lamp according to the position of sofa set and TV cabinet Dining room System will generate pendant lamp according to the position of dining set Ceiling lamp System will generate pendant lamp in all rooms except living room Wall lamp System will generate arbitrary wall lamps For example sides of a bed Floor lamp System will generate floor lamp created in 2d Desk lamp System will generate desk lamp created in 2d Note System will not generate ceiling lamp if you have made ceiling in 2d 234 Create template H Bay window GridDoor Wall hole Ground Ceiling Ceiling cornice Chair rail Skirting i Base board l Lamp d User defined rule ba Specify furniture InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 mmnnr Livingroom K L100 mm z lt lt Dingingroom diaodengO1mm lt lt Ceiling Lamp fidd002mm al lt lt W
288. termine the altitude of the lamps 3 Select the curve that defines the appearance of the lamps on the plane The X and Y coordinate value is determined by the position of the selected curve on the plane 4 8 2 4 Move on Elevation This function is similar to Move function It is used for moving object vertically While moving the object please make sure you are using WCS Select the object you want to move and then define the base point and second on the evievation view 4 8 3 Display Control of the Objects on the Ceiling Board In the drawing with complex models it is necessary to control the display of different drawings in different views to keep the window terse Under the mode of four windows you may only need to display the plane objects in the top view Anyway the 3D drawing display is more important and the plane objects are usually unnecessary to display The system provides four commands used to control the display of the ceiling 143 InteriCAD T5 User Manual board objects which are display the 3D ceiling board display the plane ceiling board hide ceiling board object and hide ceiling board plane These commands can be found in the Show Hide of 3D Ceiling 2D Ceiling menu lf you want to control the display of the objects please activate this view and then call the corresponding command 4 9 Floor 4 9 1 Construct the Floor Generate the floor slab in the specified area and requiremenis Basic operations
289. th and file name to save the solids graphics file 4 4 Perimeter amp Skirting YFCAD software has a vast range of usage with perimeter which can be used to create ceiling floor and skirting etc It must be a closed polyline when creating the floor and ceiling We can use the Perimeter function to create a perimeter in a room in no time Basic operations 1 Select Perimeter in the Structure menu 2 Inthe command window system will ask you to appoint a point in the room Left click inside the room area and you can see the inside wall line will change to dotted line Press enter to confirm selection Then the perimeter of this room is created Note The room must be a closed room so the system can search the area successfully 99 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 4 4 1 Perimeter Offset After creating the perimeter you can offset it to a different location and dimension Operations 1 2 Select Perimeter offset in the Structure menu Command window will instruct you to enter a length for the offset distance Left click in the room to get the perimeter then the perimeter will be in dotted line Left click inside the perimeter or outside the perimeter to define the position of the new perimeter The new perimeter will be generated immediately 4 4 2 Skirting Creating a skirting is similar with creating the perimeter Operations 1 2 100 Select Skirting in Structure menu A window of M
290. the High light the wall command in the Setting menu it indicates that the function is on or otherwise it is off You can switch the ON OFF status of the function by clicking the Highlight wall command in the Setting menu 40 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 11 Enter 3D From 2D to Virtual Reality 2 11 1 How to Import from 2D to Virtual Reality There are two importing methods in InteriCAD From 2D to Virtual Reality Basic operations 1 Select Enter 3D menu gt Export to VR or Select 3D Mode in Design Wizard 2 Select a temple in the popup dialogue box Press OK 41 Europeanstyle H Kitchen a o Livingroom i europeanstyle01 he D europeanstyle02 D europeanstyle03 he europeanstyle04 i europeanstyle05 7 europeanstyle06 europeanstyle08 7 europeanstyle09 7 europeanstyle10 Y livingroom01 Y livingroom02 P livingroom03 Y livingroom04 PY livingroom05 Y livingroom06 Y livingroom07 Y livingroom08 E Y livingroom09 Y livingroom10 P livingroom11 Y livingroom12 he livingroom13 Y livingroom14 Y livingroom15 Y livingroom16 Y livingroom17 C livingroom18 europeanstyle05 MV Generate ceiling lamp Use fumiture in template InteriCAD T5 User Manual europeanstyleD1 europeanstyle08 poe R i Y Add adom europeanstyle09 europeanstyle 10 Note There are 3 check boxes in the bottom to assist the conve
291. the compression format of the animation High quality compression formats are recommended such as MPEG4 and Intel Indeo_ Video Video Compression x Microsoft Video 1 Ema Configure Intel YUV codec Cinepak Codec by Radius DivX Pro 5 0 3 Codec Microsoft Video 1 W Data Rate Compression Quality is usually set to 100 while deselecting Key Frame and Data Rate Set the resolution ratio of the animation 512x384 or 640x480 in common cases or just select DVD format InteriCAD T5 User Manual Formal Format Video CD PAL Size 352 x 288 Playback 25 Frame sec Parameters Antialias Pixel Point 11 Antialias Quay 2 Raytrace Max Depth 5B We Quick Mode Disable Blurred Effect Shadow Prediction Save Every Frame E R Set the Playback to 15 if you want to play the animation on the computer or set it to 30 if you want to make the animation to DVD In other effects antialias will increase the total saving time lt is recommended to use antialias 2X2 to get better effect It is the same as making effect drawing that whether to use Quick Mode and Shadow Prediction Save Every Frame function will export every frame of the animation for furthur edit 7 The system will start calculating automatically if you single click OK 8 The time needed to save the animation will appear in the status bar We can single click Stop again to terminate the file saving process at any time Note the anima
292. the wood line Press Enter and the wood line making completed 5 5 5 User Management Mode Example 1 How to copy the system management file such as sofa to User Management mode 1 2 From the 3D Model menu click Showlib Double click system library gt 3d library gt sofa in the list Drag the sliding bar in the preview area and find the required sofa Single right click and select copy From the ibrary maintenance menu click user Switch to user library Single click using right button select add or paste If you select add a new folder will appear under User library and you can rename it with sofa Then right click the new folder and select paste Operation completes 167 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Example 2 How to add existing DWG model to user management mode in two different methods 1 Add models furniture decoration Not including stairs doors and windows Open the existing DWG model and input Insbase in command prompt and press Enter Single click the center of the model using left button and save the file From the 3D model menu select Showlib the library management dialogue box popup Click User Library to open a directory Single click the preview area in the right side using right button and select Add files the Add Files dialogue box popup In the file path press Browse and select your saved DWG file Press Enter and the operation complete Copy the jpg file of the mo
293. ting menu 2 The system automatically switches to the current workspace and you can see a prompt asking you to determine the Location It also dynamically displays the displacement relative to the previous position Click the left button at a proper position to determine the insert point you can activate the Snap function to work with this command together 2 10 7 Size Dimension and Style Function set each dimension parameters including direction and text style etc Basic operations 1 Click the Setting gt Size Dimension and Style 2 Set font text color height offset arrow style and arrow size in the popup dialogue box Press OK 39 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Dimension style Font Color Cancel Font height Origin offset Arrow style Arrow size 2 10 8 Default Text Color Function set default text color when using the Text function Basic operations 1 Click the command 2 Input default text color in the popup dialogue box Press OK 2 10 9 Default Wall Thickness Function set default thickness of wall when using Build wall function Basic operations Click the command using the left button Input default thickness of wall in the popup dialogue box Press OK 2 10 10 Highlight Wall Function set the wall shown with high light green color or not When you draw the wall it makes you easier to know which walls have been finished Basic operations If there is a mark near
294. tion file save to the frame at which the process is terminated 405 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 13 Optimize 9 13 1 Optimize Surface Radiosity calculation is to subdivide the object surface into many small patch surfaces to calculate and define the patch brightness display according to the condition that each patch receives luminous energy If there is a surface intersecting with another one on the model surface it is generally called interfere in the following contents part of the patch surface that is subdivided by the intersection part will be sheltered by the interfered surface And the luminous energy received by this patch surface is much less than the patch surface that is not interfered which cause the brightness of this patch surface is much darker than the patch surface that is not interfered Furthermore the render quality will be affected System provides surface optimization function to solve this problem Basic operations 1 Select Optimize Surface from Optimize menu Then cursor will turn into 2 Click the surface you wish to optimize hold Shift to add more 3 Right click to confirm your selection then software will start calculation automatically Cursor will turn back to original style after operation is done Note Even if the selected surface is not intervened the software will reset the surface to patches You can change patch size through File gt Setting gt VR Option enter value for Mesh Size i
295. tract is applicable only when the attribute value belongs to the attribute of an entity such as shape of wall hole baseline of wood line and profile It is used to extract certain components of the selected object and shape another graph The operational procedure is shown as follow Choose the attribute that is available from the Attribute in the Edit 191 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Attribute Remember the Extract button in the dialog box must be available 4 Left click the Extract button 5 Here operation differs according to the attribute For the attribute that is not necessary to extract in the original position like section should be oriented in the graph 6 Back to the dialog box and click OK to finish the operation 8 3 4 Common Attributes The content of attribute differs with accordance to different type of object but each type of object has its similar attributes to others such as Name Display Color and Hide Here we take wall for instance to explain the said common attributes 7 Name Name is the attribute that is used to mark object The only operation available is Edit The operational procedure of Name edit e Choose Name from the Attribute in the Edit Attribute and then click Edit e Input a new name in the Insert and then click OK e Here Name has already been changed the moment Edit Attribute dialogue box reoccurs Click OK 192 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Edit Attribute Insert
296. ttachment 1 C Users yfcad Desktop Sphere jpg Modify Submit 9 Once you confrim click Submit to upload the material to YFCAD 413 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Detail Information j o Model Type Modern Classic Decoration Y Share my model Decoration ModelService 1 This is a standard geometric model 2 Pure white Uploading Part2 Check Model 1 Click ia E Shock Model y and switch to My Order to check how many models you have uploaded to YFCAD 414 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Check Model SO E A My Order My Model N hed iCheckServer exe i EA Double ESTU Clicks sample0202 Submit pyramid0 1 Failure Sphere001 Failure T5TEST_2010082401 Time 20100731180243 Time 20 100806 160009 Time 201008 13145758 i A MO waztest00 101 Submit waztest00202 Submit waztest00303 Submit waztest00404 Submit Time 20100906155040 Time 20100906155131 Time 20100906155231 Time 20100906 155318 Failure Time 20 100824171603 2 If the model you uploaded is proved system will show its name and status Submit However if the model material you uploaded is not enough or unqualified you can check the preview image with Failure status and then double click to check the necessary material The material required for the model will be listed in the dialog below Failure Info Laii There is no front view for this model A minimal ima
297. tting Elevation The value controls the height of the room while export from 2D to VR But it will not be activated while you have set ceiling in 2D Wall Lamp System will automatically layout wall lamps in certain position such as both sides of the bed Sunlight System will automatically activate sunlight effect Brightness The value controls the strength of the sunlight effect The higher the value is the stronger the sunlight will be Additional mrm Directory You can define a directory for your own mrm files System will firstly search for the mrm files in X interiCAD T5 vr vrlib and then in the additional mrm directory 222 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Create template Template file J Import Setting General setting Wall Elevation 2600 Single door 11 Dual door Push door Wall Lamp Collapse door T Sunlight Brightness f Balcony door Window Bay window L GridDoor Additional mrm Directory Wall hole Ground y Open Save Cancel Wall Default System will automatically define material for wall if you activate this option User defines User can define their favorite material for the wall Note Click you can select material from the library You can also use the material in the scene by clicking Pick up lt lt button Create template 5 O NT 7 Wall setting AN o l Default ELITTTTTTTTTTTETTTTTTTETEEE General setting User Def
298. ture InteriCAD T5 User Manual when there is no color texture map Use the Hue Saturation and Value system for toning In the physical world the reflection light of different materials is also different For example the red paper will make the white wall around it become red But to a smooth red marble the red saturation of the wall around is much lower than that made by the red paper This parameter can be used to control the color saturation of the reflection light If the value is 1 the color saturation of the reflection light is the same as that of the material If the value is 0 5 the color saturation of the reflection light is only half of that of the material If the value is O the color saturation of the reflection light is 0 which means it is neutral color white After using radiosity this parameter can control the brightness of the texture mapping For example if the texture is red and its saturation is high but the brightness is small this texture will appear to be dark red But if you give this material strong light it will display the bright red You can use this parameter to make this texture display its original dark red The value can be 0 to infinite Value 1 means normal display and values above 1 will increase the brightness of the texture map Value 0 means the texture is completely dark And this parameter can be applied to pure color material For example you can set the texture brightness of the white wash
299. ture mapping has no effect Click the Texture button of reflection texture mapping Material Editor Base Color Reflection Transparency Stencil Bump 4 r Reflection Smoothness 1 00 0 0 gt 1000 Gloss Size 30 0 001 1000 Texture None Inverse Raytrace Max W Global Select Apply Move 4 Select the required black and white picture by browsing Function of Inverse the system makes an inversion process to the black and white picture that is interchanges white color and black color It results that original reflection area cannot reflect any more while original non reflection area can reflect now 332 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Effect of graved mirror eo Transparency texture mapping Transparency texture mapping uses a pattern file to control the transparency of different areas of object surface First the system turns this picture to a black and white one among which the pure black area is shown using default transparency while the pure white area is completely nontransparent The gray level between pure black and pure white is represented by transparency grade That is we can make a glass from completely transparent to completely nontransparent Basic operations 1 Open the Material Editor 2 Switch to Transparency label If you want to make pure transparent material you can set the transparency to 1 Note that if you want to use transparency texture map the t
300. ual to 90 Basic operations 1 Select the grid on Axis from the structure menu 2 Input definition data of the grid on axis in the Grid on Axis dialogue box Press OK 83 InteriCAD T5 User Manual South End North End West End East End 3 3000 3 3000 3 4500 3 4500 3 3000 33000 34500 34500 Dimension sooo Dimension 3000 3000 Dimension jasoo Dimension 4500 Nabe Number E Number Nantes Add Insert Delete Modify Reset Other Parameter Horizontal Axis Angle fo Vertical Axis Angle Single Direction OK Cancel Help User can input various parameters of the axis in each field Input dimension parameters in Number and Dimension field and press Add button to add these parameters to the end of the corresponding list The parameters can be input one by one Buttons such as Insert Delete Modify and Reset can be used to modify the parameters Explanation of each field in the dialogue box South End the section dimension labels the axis below the current input axis zone North End the section dimension labels the axis above the current input axis zone West End the interval dimension labels the axis left to the current input axis zone East End the interval dimension labels the axis right to the current input axis zone Horizontal axis angle the inclination between the latitudinal axis and 84 InteriCAD T5 User Manual the horizontal direction Normal
301. ually is used in lampshade lamp box surface sunlit window screen and ground glass with lamp hidden in etc Material Editor Base Color Reflection Transparency Stencil Bump 4 Name Shelf Panel Type User Defined Reflect Transmit 0 3 H 01 Map Size 500 500 Global Update AutoMapping AllMapping f Select Apply Move The edit method is very simple and you only need to set an appropriate value for transparency in the Material Editor Transparent material s lamp box Reflection texture mapping Reflection texture mapping is a kind of black and white picture whose supporting formats include JPG BMP and TIF It requires the black 330 InteriCAD T5 User Manual part of the picture be pure black while the white part be pure white It can use the black and white picture to control surface reflection area The black part cannot reflect light while the white part can reflect light according to reflection parameter setting For example suppose to make an engraved mirror The graved part of mirror cannot reflect light while other parts without pattern can normally reflect light Reflection texture map can easily realize the function Basic operations 1 2 Open the Material Editor Switch to Reflection label If you want to make pure mirror you can set the reflection to 1 Note that if you want to use reflection texture mapping the reflection must not be 0 otherwise reflection tex
302. ue in Number column for the number of objects you wish to copy including the origin 4 Click preview as shown below 5 Click Apply to finish Move the Object Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit Object and then Move 2 Left click the object that will be edited After selection right click to confirm the selection This selection operation is the same as that of ACAD 3 Left click one point as the move base point or start point 4 Move the mouse and you can see the object dynamically moves following 311 InteriCAD T5 User Manual the mouse Left click to confirm Rotate the Object Basic operations e From the Object menu select Edit Object and then Rotate eo Left click the object that will be edited and right click to confirm the selection e Use the left button to single click one point as the rotate center point Move the mouse and you can see the object dynamically rotates following the mouse Press the left button to confirm Scale the Object Basic operations 1 From the Object menu select Edit object and then Scale 2 Click the object that will be edited using the left button and use the right button to confirm the selection 3 Use the left button to single click one point as the scale base point and single click the other point as the scale reference point 4 Move the mouse and you can see the object dynamically scales following the mouse Press
303. ule is how to pave in a region With user friendly operating interface and flexible operating method users can almost finish the entire paving process only with a mouse 50 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operation to place a tile Choose from system database Basic operations 1 2 Query the database with specified conditions to get all eligible tiles Choose a tile from query results Use the mouse to drag it to the target region and then release left button Move the cursor in the region to get a suitable position and angle Left click to place the tile It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles To modify any existing tile right click on it to display shortcut menu All relevant edit functions can be found in this menu Use external Jpg format picture Basic operations 1 Find required Jpg format picture via Windows explorer or external image browser program then directly drag and drop it to the region Set size in the dialog box popping up and then move the cursor in the region to get a suitable position and angle Left click to place the tile It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles To modify an existing tile right click on it to display shortcut menu All relevant edit functions can be found in this menu 83 4 1 Worktable The worktable integrates the material and specification management functions for ceramic design project It pr
304. ure Ceiling Region Pave Enter3D Setting Help Ly E E a A A La ll E las A AA a 019 W B e aldo Insert Image Build Room Column Door Window Zoom Extend Zoom Window Snap Snap Setting Line Arc Circe Ellipse Pline Text Dimension Create All Floor Pave Door Region Query Tiles Tiles Quotation Update VR Print Zoom all A EY M Snap at length Y Snap at angle Y Snap atnode Snap at grid r The interface includes Menu All commands can be found in menu Toolbar Shortcut icons of main commands can be found Design Wizard Showing the steps of design Drawing space Where you can draw the floor plan Furniture library includes Yuan Fang system library and manufacturer s customized library Left click to unfold each category and call certain piece of furniture InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 2 Common Operation 2 2 1 Usage of the Mouse Left click Most commands are accomplished by left click For example selecting pull down menu clicking icon on toolbar and etc Right click Some commands are ended by right click For any existing object right click it and the edit command will be shown Note No matter what command is being executed right click and the command will exit 2 2 2 Two Operation Rules Rule No 1 Select command first Then follow the prompt to execute further operation Rule No 2 Select object first Then right click and the exclusive edit menu towards th
305. urface to layout ceramic slices For example the floor surface in the following image 3 System will start the 2D Design module automatically and then import the selected surface 349 InteriCAD T5 User Manual A HA 20 Design File E Edit E View Y Draw Dj Room structure R Ceiling C Region Pave Enter3D Settings Help H Dedo o 202 FOBAX A FOAMMADA N BONBOCRHO Navigator Insert Image A Build Room Column Door Window Zoom Extend Zoom Window Snap Snap Setting Arc Circle Ellipse Pline Text Dimension Create All Floor Pave Door Region Query Tiles Tilas Aunbsatian Li if Sal o ES system library a Furniture i Additional Library IY A Additional Library vol 3 Additional Library Yol2 home Furniture office Furniture pe is iit E Keep original size in replace Search 4 layout ceramic slices in 2D Design module and then use Update VR command to export them to Render 5 System switches to Render module automatically and the ceramic slices have been applied to corresponding surface 350 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 9 2 Clear Tiling Delete all the ceramic slices on a surface in Render module Basic operations 1 Select the Clear Tiling command from the Tiling menu 2 Left click to select the surface to delete all the ceramic slices on tt 9 9 3 Apply Tiling Plan U
306. ursor close to regional boundary or existing tiles current tile will snap to them automatically Press Spacebar to rotate the tile 15 degrees anti clockwise each time 4 Left click to place the tile in suitable position and angle It will be cut automatically according to the region boundary and existing tiles Cutting 54 InteriCAD T5 User Manual result differs according to the setting of cut style Please refer to Tiles cut style 3 4 4 Replace Tile in the Region Basic operations 1 Choose a tile from search result 2 Left click on the tile and then drag it to target region Replace Tile Two modes are valid Please select Only change the selected one e Change all same tiles in the region 3 Move cursor over the existing tile and then release left button Program will display Replace Tile dialog box If two sizes are different program will prompt that cannot replace with different specification If two sizes are the same but types are different the replace tile dialogue box will pop up There are two replacing modes Choose one and press OK button Note replace function is only available for tiles in same size 3 4 5 Region Tiling Begins from Tiles There are different methods to place tiles in the region Right click on a tile and then a shortcut menu will be displayed All methods can be found in this menu Note it is suggested that all the properties such as rotate angle and cut style should be set up b
307. utton to terminate the current command In most object editing commands the function of the right button and Enter is the same Two Basic Operation Rules Rule 1 Select the command and follow the command prompts For operation convenience most common used commands have been integrated in the tool bar Rule 2 You can directly select the command first and then select object to operate Introduction to the Command on the Menu Bar File Open Open InteriCAD VR file and the file format is mrs 204 InteriCAD T5 User Manual New Create an empty scene Import From Modeling Import 3D model from Modeling Merge From Modeling Merge the 3D model imported from Modeling to the current InteriCAD VR scene Import 3DMax Model Import mtf file output by 3DMax This file type can be output only when you have installed the plug in for 3DMax Merge 3DMax Model Merge mit file output by 3DMax to the current InteriCAD VR scene Import 3ds Sketchup model Import 3ds skp mtf files output by 3DMax or sketchup Import 2D File Intelligent import the STD and KOC file drawn by InteriCAD 2D Design Template Setting The intelligent import of 2D interactive STD file is controlled by STD template And this command is used to add and adjust existing STD template Slope ceiling Create slope ceiling for current scene Setting Use Animate cursor InteriCAD VR provides a series of animate cursors to display different status
308. vation menu 4 7 1 2 Origin Point Setting Use this function to set the origin of a new coordinate system All the parameters of the new coordinate system are same to the previous one except this origin Basic operations 115 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 1 From Elevation menu select Set Origin Point 2 Select one point on the screen as the origin of the new coordinate system 4 7 1 3 Trim and Display Drawing in the Elevation Window On setting up elevation the system applies trimming view to the elevation view in which the trimming plane is the XY plane of the UCS In the elevation view those drawing at the same side of the view port relative to the trimming plane the values in Z coordinate are negative are completely hidden The view trims out all objects between the elevation and the observation point When these drawing are in hidden display the graphs on the facade will not be covered For some reason if you want to view those hidden drawing by the trimming view then select Show all from Elevation menu 4 7 2 Niche on a Wall During the interior design it is common to niche on a wall to place door and windows and other decorations with special effect YuanFang Interior Design System provides such an easy to use convenient function for niching on a wall With this function you can make a through or un through hole of any form and depth on a straight wall or curve wall To create a niche on a linear wall 1 Fro
309. ve the grid on center is generated in 87 InteriCAD T5 User Manual the clockwise direction e Add add Number and Dimension parameters to the end of the corresponding list e Insert if one item has been selected in the list insert a new item before that one e Delete if one item has been selected in the list delete it e Modify if one item has been selected in the list use a new one to replace it e Reset Reset all the data in the dialogue box A sub dialogue box will pop up to prevent unintended operation 3 Determine the locating point of grid on axis The figure shown below is the grid on center based on the data in the dialogue box above 4 2 3 Display Control of Grid on Axis It is convenient to control the showing and hiding of the grid on axis The command of controlling the display of grid on axis is Grid Hide and Show which are under the Structure menu The entire grid on axis is hidden after using Hide command and will be shown again after using Show command 4 3 Wall Wall is indispensable during the interior design InteriCAD provides a comprehensive set of tools for building and modifying the wall by which you 88 InteriCAD T5 User Manual can easily build a straight wall or curve wall 4 3 1 Build a Wall The system provides several methods to build a new wall such as direct building grid base wall line and building a rectangular room The new built wall will use the system default
310. very face is in the direction of center The faces that have been sheltered completely or partially cannot be adjusted Recommendation you can first adjust the front face back face and material of common 3D model then save the InteriCAD VR block finally save it to the InteriCAD VR library 9 7 4 Align Object You can align any objects in Render arrange and combine objects easily Basic operations 1 Select Align from Object menu as shown below 308 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Align surface of target object To Target s Top Bottom Let C Right C Front f Back f Center AT XG Y B ZAR Move Object Target Object Min C Min Center C Center C Max Max 2 Click Move Object button to select the object you wish to move click Target Object to select reference object 3 Select different modes of align The software provides three modes e Use coordinates and object surface as orientation e Use object outline as orientation e Use moved distance as orientation Choose different align mode to see instant change of object position Click Apply to finish 9 7 5 Snap On Select Snap On from Object menu Snap mode will be activated 9 7 6 Edit Object 309 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Array Array objects on x y z axes according to pre specified rules There are linear array and rectangle array Relative Second Point Xais 0 Basic operations Yas 0 1 Se
311. wall has disappeared Note When using this function to edit the selected wall all other walls will be updated automatically 4 3 2 9 Trim Wall Corner During the design process error may occur between the intersected straight walls with exceeding or lacking segments You can use this function to improve their intersection This function is only applicable to straight wall 97 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Basic operations 1 Select Edit wall from Structure menu then Trim corner 2 Select the first wall Note that the selected point should be close to the wall corner 3 Select the second wall Note that the selected point should be close to the wall corner 4 3 2 10 Convert Wall to Solid The system provides the function to change walls to solids by which you can perform Boolean operations and easily process complex modeling operations Basic operations 1 Select Convert Wall to solid from Structure menu This dialogue box indicates the way to convert and decides whether to union all solids If all walls belong to one timber in the virtual reality VR it is recommended to select this check box 98 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Convert C All walls Selected walls Y Union all solidst Solid version file name Caution This operation should be done just before you enter the VR Cancel 2 Select the walls to be converted If it is All walls then it is necessary to specify the pa
312. whether to save it Click Yes the system will save the file If it is a new file the file will be saved as a new file Click No the system will open a new file without saving the current file If Cancel the system will not open a new file 9 3 4 Import from Modeling Enter InteriCAD VR from main interface From the File menu select Import from Modeling command or you can click the a button on the tool bar Then it will switch to InteriCAD Modeling part According to the prompt of Select objects you can select the corresponding object If you want to select all the objects you can input ALL and then press Enter Now the system will make some corresponding transformation of the model and all the faces will be transformed to Single face one face can be seen only from that side but can not be seen from the other side And then all the faces will be divided equally After all the process has been done the model will appear in the perspective workplace of InteriCAD VR If you don t need to continue merging models you can close Modeling part to save system resource 9 3 5 Merge from Modeling e Click File gt Merge from Modeling in menu bar 216 InteriCAD T5 User Manual e The system will switch to InteriCAD Modeling part According to the prompt of Select objects you can select the corresponding object right click to confirm and appoint the observer point After all the process has been done the model will appear
313. white surfaces as an example After some times of radiosity calculation the whole scene will become no levels Because the indirect light will illuminate the part that originally has shadow As the shadow becomes unclear or pale in color the whole scene will become no levels The diffuse factor is used to control the attenuation level of indirect light Value 1 of this parameter means the pure white material will reflect 100 light energy for secondary lighting Value 0 means this surface will absorb all the light which equals no indirect lighting This parameter should be specified according to solid conditions For the scene that has numerous light sources this value can be lower down In most cases the default value 0 9 is ok Under most circumstances the effect will be good using normal precision while the high precision takes much longer calculation time It will take the current mainstream computer several minutes to calculate a moderately scene using normal precision and half an hour for high precision The value of user define precision can be set between these two values as a compromise scheme 9 11 1 3 Sky method Indoor When render the interior environment please Indoor Sky Method If we have defined the sunlight please choose Calculate Sunlight Though Opening Only In this way we can improve the render speed Ourdoor 373 InteriCAD T5 User Manual When render the exterior environment please choose Outdoor Sky Method N
314. window When the cabinet is highlighted in green it means you can left click the mouse to locate the cabinet Align When locating the cabinet moving the mouse forward and backward will help you to align the cabinet with other objects in the room e Useful Key When Locating Cabinet 1 Space Bar when Layout the unit the space bar has two functions 1 pressing Space bar you can rotate the unit 2 to those units that have several possible places as shown in the figure below by pressing space bar you can change the arrangement direction InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 SHIFT Cancel the snap function of this unit with other units except wall Press SHIFT again to resume all the snap functions 3 CTRL remove all the snap functions of the unit which means the unit will not snap to any object Press CTRL again to resume all the snap functions TWO AUTO LOTATION AUTO LOCATION LOCATION AFTER PRESS SPACE BAR e Arrangement of the kitchen cabinet unit when there is a corner of non 90 degrees There are two conditions of the non 90 degrees corner less than 90 degrees and more than 90 degrees Next we will introduce their arrangement method separately As shown in the figure when select the Create worktop command the system can find the corner automatically and deploy the worktop correctly Other components such as the plinth can also be deployed automatically TWO UNITS AT THE CONNER AUTO WORKTOP AFTER AUTO WORKTOP qe IN
315. wing in the dialogue box If you use the printer to print the drawing resolution 150 is more than sufficient 384 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Then select the image size that will be printed Save Image Image Size Usage Raytrace Raytrace Max Depth E Antialias Pixel Point 1x1 Antialias Quality 3 Shadow Prediction w Quick Mode Disable Blurred Effect Output Methods f Snapshot f 3D Glasses f Panorama Cancel e Choose a calculation method 1 Raytrace a The common setting of Antialias Pixel Point is 2x2 or 3x3 and Raytrace Max Depth is 5 b As the time of calculation with blur effect will increase by 5 to 8 times you can select quick mode to disable blur effect c Enable Shadow prediction can accelerate the speed of raytrace but errors may occur Snapshot is general effect drawing 2 Photon Map Raytrace The common setting of Raytrace Max Depth is 3 b As the time of calculation determines the rendering effect the value of Scan times should not be less than 20 c Enabling Infinite will require manual operation to stop the calculation e Set picture output type in Output Methods a Snapshot is standard color picture b 3D glass is to make the 3D effect drawing that can be viewed by 3D 385 InteriCAD T5 User Manual glasses c Panorama drawing is the drawing using the current position point as center and embrace 360 degrees to calculate the whole scene You can use 3D Panoto to view it Aft
316. wise 296 InteriCAD T5 User Manual Anticlockwise b Select two points to define an arc Line mode f Line e Arc C Center Point Second Point a Insert Point atthe beginning 4 Define coordinate Define the first point 0 0 and then input coordinate to define the next point Relative to the last point X 1709 Y 0 Apply 297 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 5 Back Cancel current operation and return to the last one Redo Return to the last operation Clear Delete all the lines except offset line Close Connect the nearest two points Undo Clear 6 OK Turn to next step Cancel Cancel the current operation and exit User set the elevation and thickness for the worktop and click OK to finish Besides automatically generating Worktop the system also allows the user to manually generate it 9 6 7 Create Plinth After finished the base unit layout we can install the plinth now Select Kitchen Design gt Create Plinth menu then the system will automatically search for all the base unit and install plinth at the bottom of them As the same as the Create Worktop the system can take the continually arranged base unit as a group to deal with which will generate a complete piece of Plinth for the combined parts The height of the Plinth is that one set by the Parameter setting command from the Settings menu Similarly if creating a Plinth with the Manually generate Plinth command before auto
317. without influencing the final plot effect that is use the Show image command to show all images and take them as an assistant when portray a drawing when export the final 2D effect drawing hide all images so that they will not influence the final effect 14 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 2 6 Drawing Tool 2 6 1 Line Function Draw straight lines on the current workspace floor Basic operations 1 Click Line in the Draw menu 2 Click the workspace for a start point of the line 3 Move the mouse to define the length and degree of the line You can also input the accurate value of the line Length means the length of the line Angle means the angle between the line and horizon Relative angle means the angel between the active line and previous line clockwise 4 Left click again to determine the end point You can continue to draw lines one by another Left click to finish operation 2 6 2 Arc Three points arc Function Draw an arc on the current workspace floor Basic operations Select Arc in the Draw menu and three point arc from arc parameter dialog Left click the mouse in the workspace for the start point Move the mouse and left click to determine the end point You will see an arc after you draw the end point When you move the mouse you will see the shape of the arc change accordingly Left click to determine the final shape Fillet Function Fillet the angle of two connected lines 15 InteriCAD
318. y and Extract to wall hole 2 Location Wall hole can be fixed in any location of wall like in the middle or at the borderline But you must locate it within the wall During the dynamic 199 InteriCAD T5 User Manual orientation the location of the cross cursor is the same as to the anchor point If you modify the wall hole position by other edit tool the new wall hole can be displayed only by updating the wall Depth You can define the dimension vertical to wall By setup different depth you can get wall hole either in transparent or opaque form Segments per Curve Segment per Curve that helps to control the graphic precision is only of avail to arc wall with wall hole The more Segments per Curve you adjust the higher graphic precision you will get 8 4 Other Functions 8 4 1 System Optimizing 8 4 1 1 Document Cleaned up You can optimize the system by this function that will help you to remove the useless fragments like drawings layer line type model file and font style etc 8 4 1 2 Compress amp Restore The ram consumes a lot when dealing with the complicated graph and 3D objects Use the Compress function will help you to reduce the ram consumption and speed up the display by covert 3D graph to 2D You can display them in 3D by Restore function 8 4 1 3 Edit Shortcut Most of the time you need to input the command in the command interface so as to quicken the drawing Here you can edit command sh
319. y can not be move any more In the latter part of this document there are detailed instructions about right click menus Select Group tl Home Furniture i Kitchen Items Sanitary Ware E Plant i E Household Electricity Appliances i H Interior Decoration Office Furniture H Door and Window i Structure ID meu Tar De E Classic Furniture i Fl Lamp Appliance E Electric Fitting E Home Furniture Collection amp European Furniture Collection fl Kitchen and Bath Collection BL Office Furniture Collection E User library El User library Hew Group Rename aj Lighting Marble j Mosaic Copy to Mowe to Sort Delete After we finish building the directory structure we can start to add textures and models into the library 259 InteriCAD T5 User Manual 9 5 3 7 Add Textures Select a directory then right click in the working area Select Import texture ID Name Type Class Brand Manufacturer Price Length 1 i i gt Import Model Single EN Import Model Multi EN Import Texture ea 4 EA C Ea EA E Ta 12 BNSSRSRS Sess aES bh to Find the target pictures in dialog box Then click OK The number of the selected files is not limited z0 a A E ls Lo Lo rh m m A o A A re CREPE 2601 jpg ro CREPE 2608 jpg Tre CREPE 2620 jpg o CREPE 2649 jp p ws O of E hi HA mm E Ti J mre CREPE 9701 j

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents